Mercedes Benz Automobile 2002 SLK 230 Kompressor User Manual

SLK-Class  
Operator’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.  
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your  
desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.  
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of  
ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:  
Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for  
your reference.  
Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the  
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.  
Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety  
of the vehicle operator and occupants.  
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.  
DaimlerChrysler AG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors ................................................. 28 Emergency tensioning retractor  
Introduction  
(ETR) .............................................53  
Central locking switch .................... 30  
Product information .......................... 5  
Operator’s manual ............................. 6  
Where to find it ................................ 11  
Reporting Safety Defects ................ 13  
Airbags ..............................................54  
Safety guidelines for the  
seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor  
and airbag .................................... 61  
Infant and  
Automatic central locking ...............31  
Emergency unlocking in  
case of accident .......................... 32  
Trunk ................................................. 33  
Emergency release  
for trunk lid ................................. 35  
Antitheft alarm system ................... 35  
Tow-away alarm ............................... 37  
Seats .................................................. 38  
Seat heater ........................................ 42  
Seat belts and  
integrated restraint system ....... 44  
Seat belts .......................................... 44  
Seat belt nonusage  
Instruments and controls  
child restraint systems ...............63  
Adjusting telescoping  
Instruments and controls ............... 16  
Center console .............................. 18  
Overhead control panel ............... 19  
steering column ..........................65  
Rear view mirrors ............................66  
Instrument cluster ...........................70  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........77  
Checking engine oil level ..............79  
Engine oil consumption ..................80  
Exterior lamp switch ....................... 81  
Headlamp cleaning system ............82  
Combination switch ........................83  
Hazard warning flasher switch .....85  
Operation  
Vehicle keys ......................................22  
Remote control with  
folding master key ......................22  
Start lock-out ....................................23  
General notes on the  
central locking system ...............23  
Central locking system ...................24  
Remote control .............................24  
Panic button ..................................26  
Mechanical keys ...........................27  
warning system ............................ 45  
BabySmartTM airbag  
deactivation system ....................51  
Self-test BabySmartTM without  
special child seat installed ..........51 Climate control .................................86  
Supplemental restraint system  
Rear window defroster ....................90  
Audio and telephone, operation ....93  
Power windows ................................111  
(SRS) ............................................. 52  
Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
2
Interior lighting ............................. 112 Tele Aid ............................................132 Cruise control ................................. 166  
Night security illumination ......... 112 Catalytic converter ........................ 140 Brake assist system  
(BAS) ...........................................169  
Antilock brake system  
(ABS) ........................................... 171  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP) ...........................................173  
What you should know  
Sun visors with Vanity Mirror ......113 Emission control .............................141  
Interior .............................................113 Steering lock .................................. 142  
Cup holder and glove box ..............114 Starting and turning off  
the engine .................................. 144  
Manual transmission .................... 145  
Automatic transmission ............... 147  
Parking brake .................................156  
Driving instructions .......................157  
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ........157  
Drinking and driving .................157  
Pedals ...........................................157  
Power assistance .........................158  
Brakes ...........................................158  
Driving off ....................................159  
Parking .........................................159  
Tires ..............................................160  
Snow chains ................................163  
Winter driving instructions ......163  
Block heater .................................165  
Deep water ...................................165  
Passenger compartment ............165  
Traveling abroad .........................165  
Storage compartments ...................115  
Ashtrays ...........................................116  
Coin Holder ......................................116  
Lighter ..............................................117  
Parcel net in passenger footwell ..118  
Shelf behind roll bars .....................118  
Cellular telephone ..........................118  
Garage door opener ........................119  
Retractable hardtop .......................122  
Wind screen ....................................127  
Luggage cover .................................128  
at the gas station .......................177  
Check regularly and  
before a long trip ......................179  
Instrument cluster display  
Malfunction and  
indicator lamps in the  
instrument cluster ....................182  
On-board diagnostic system .....182  
Check engine malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................182  
Brake warning lamp ..................183  
Brake pad wear  
indicator lamp .............................184  
Seat belt nonusage  
warning lamp ..............................184  
Driving  
Control and operation of  
radio transmitters .....................130  
The first 1 000 miles  
(1 500 km) ................................. 131  
Maintenance ................................... 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) indicator lamp ..................184  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap  
placement warning ....................185  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP) — warning lamp ...............185  
BAS / ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................185  
ABS malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................186  
Telescoping steering column  
warning lamp ..............................186  
Low engine coolant level  
warning lamp ..............................187  
Low windshield and headlamp  
washer system fluid level  
warning lamp ..............................187  
Low engine oil level  
Malfunction and indicator lamp  
in the center console ................190  
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .....190  
Storage box, TIREFIT-Kit,  
air pump, Vehicle tools  
(SLK 32 AMG only) ...................202  
Wheels .............................................203  
Tire replacement ........................203  
Rotating wheels ..........................204  
Spare wheel ....................................205  
Spare wheel bolts .......................206  
Changing wheels ...........................207  
Inflating the collapsible  
Practical hints  
First aid kit ......................................192  
Stowing items in the vehicle ........192  
Fuses ................................................192  
Hood .................................................194  
Automatic transmission  
fluid level ....................................196  
Checking engine oil level ..............197  
Coolant level ....................................198  
Adding coolant ............................198  
Windshield and  
headlamp washer system .........199  
Air pump, spare wheel,  
vehicle tools,  
storage compartment  
(except SLK 32 AMG) .............. 200  
Vehicle jack  
spare tire ..................................... 212  
Storing spare wheel in  
wheel well ................................... 213  
TIREFIT ........................................... 214  
Tire inflation pressure .................. 219  
Battery .............................................220  
Jump starting ..................................222  
Towing the vehicle .........................224  
Transmission selector lever,  
manually unlocking ..................229  
Exterior lamps ................................230  
Headlamp assembly ...................231  
warning lamp ..............................188  
Charge indicator lamp ...............188  
Exterior lamp failure i  
ndicator lamp ..............................189  
Additional function  
indicator lamps  
(except SLK 32 AMG) .............. 201  
Taillamp assemblies ..................234  
(in the odometer display) ..........189  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
Changing batteries in  
Light alloy wheels .....................250 Premium unleaded gasoline ........269  
Instrument cluster ..................... 251 Fuel requirements .........................269  
the remote control ....................236  
Synchronizing  
Steering wheel and  
gear selector lever ..................... 251  
Gasoline additives .........................270  
Coolants ...........................................270  
Consumer information ..................272  
remote control ............................237  
Raising hardtop manually ............238  
Replacing wiper blade insert .......243  
Antenna ...........................................244  
Cup holder .................................. 251  
Hard plastic trim items ............. 251  
Plastic and rubber parts ........... 251  
Headliner and  
shelf behind roll bars ................252  
Upholstery ..................................252  
Seat belts ..................................... 252  
Index  
Manual release  
Index ................................................274  
of fuel filler flap ........................244  
Vehicle care  
Cleaning and care of  
Technical data  
the vehicle ..................................246  
Power washer ..............................247  
Paintwork, painted body  
components .................................247  
Tar stains .....................................247  
Engine cleaning ..........................248  
Vehicle washing .........................248  
Headlamps, taillamps,  
turn signal lenses ......................249  
Window cleaning ........................249  
Rear window cleaning ...............249  
Wiper blades ...............................250  
Spare parts service .......................254  
Warranty coverage ........................ 254  
Identification labels ......................255  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ........... 257  
Technical data ................................ 260  
Fuels, coolants,  
lubricants etc. – capacities ..... 266  
Engine oils ...................................... 268  
Engine oil additives ......................268  
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........268  
Brake fluid ...................................... 268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product information  
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:  
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories  
explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.  
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special  
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.  
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible  
for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other  
agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,  
performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.  
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available  
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on  
permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.  
Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
6
Operator’s manual  
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize  
yourself with the vehicle before driving.  
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings  
contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.  
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations  
for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment,  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.  
Service and warranty information  
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your  
Mercedes-Benz, including:  
New Car Limited Warranty,  
Emission System Warranty,  
Emission Performance Warranty,  
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty  
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),  
State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles  
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease  
price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ore more substantial  
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair  
attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles on  
the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail  
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a  
condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has  
been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the  
need for its repair and have given us a direct opportunity to perform a repair ourselves, (2) the same substantial defect  
or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have  
directly notified us of the need for its repair and given us the opportunity to repair ourselves, or (3) the vehicle is out  
of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of  
more than 30 calender days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,  
Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.  
Maintenance  
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.  
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for  
service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.  
Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
8
Roadside assistance  
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown.  
Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)  
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)  
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.  
Change of address or ownership  
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty  
Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can  
contact you should the need arise.  
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.  
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and  
Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:  
Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,  
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage  
the catalysts,  
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.  
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details,  
consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:  
In the USA:  
In Canada:  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC  
European Delivery Department  
One Mercedes Drive  
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.  
European Delivery Department  
849 Eglinton Avenue East  
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5  
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350  
Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
10  
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make  
changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual  
might differ from your vehicle.  
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they  
are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your  
vehicle.  
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.  
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to find it  
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:  
• Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.  
• Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation.  
• Driving: Important information on driving.  
• Instrument cluster display: Indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions.  
• Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency.  
• Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.  
• Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels,  
coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.  
• Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.  
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment.  
Explanation of color used:  
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and  
others appear on red background.  
Introduction  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
12  
Problems with your vehicle  
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect  
its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to  
have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your  
satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if  
necessary contact us at the following addresses:  
In the USA: Customer Assistance Center  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC  
One Mercedes Drive  
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350  
In Canada:  
Customer Relations Department  
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.  
849 Eglinton Avenue East  
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the USA only:  
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,  
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  
Reporting Safety Defects  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety  
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA  
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA,  
LLC.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236  
or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.  
Introduction  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls ............... 16  
Center console .............................. 18  
Overhead control panel ............... 19  
Contents - Instruments and controls  
15  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Side defroster outlet, adjustable  
2 Cruise control switch, see page 166  
3 Side air outlet, adjustable  
15 Air volume control for center air outlets  
16 Climate control, see page 86  
Rear window defroster, see page 90  
17 Glove box (illuminated with key in steering lock  
4 Combination switch, see page 83  
5 Exterior lamp switch, see page 81  
6 Hood lock release, see page 194  
7 Instrument cluster, see page 70  
8 Horn (with key in steering lock position 1 or 2)  
9 Airbag  
position 1 or 2), see page 114  
18 Audio system, see page 93  
19 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 85  
20 Central locking switch, see page 30  
21 Left seat heater switch, see page 42  
22 Headlamp washer switch, see page 82  
23 ESP control switch, see page 175  
24 Tow-away alarm switch, see page 37  
25 Right seat heater switch, see page 42  
26 Ashtray, coin holder, see page 116  
27 Storage compartment  
10 Steering wheel adjustment handle, see page 65  
11 Steering lock with ignition/starter switch,  
see page 142  
12 Voice recognition system switch, see separate  
operating instructions  
13 Cup holder, see page 114  
14 Center air outlets, adjustable  
Instruments and controls  
17  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Center console  
18  
1 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see page 190  
2 Power window switch, see page 111  
3 Parking brake lever, see page 156  
4 Mirror adjustment switch, see page 66  
5 Hardtop operation switch, see page 122  
6 Lighter, see page 117  
Storage compartment, see page 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overhead control panel  
1 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid, telephone and  
voice recognition system  
2 Interior lighting, see page 112  
3 Tele Aid (emergency call system), see page 132  
4 Garage door opener, see page 119  
5 Rear view mirror, see page 66  
Instruments and controls  
19  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Contents - Operation  
20  
Emergency release  
for trunk lid ................................. 35  
Antitheft alarm system ................... 35  
Tow-away alarm ............................... 37  
Seats .................................................. 38  
Seat heater ........................................ 42  
Seat belts and  
integrated restraint system ....... 44  
Seat belts .......................................... 44  
Seat belt nonusage  
Airbags ..............................................54  
Safety guidelines for the  
seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor  
and airbag .................................... 61  
Infant and  
Operation  
Vehicle keys ......................................22  
Remote control with  
folding master key ......................22  
Start lock-out ....................................23  
child restraint systems ...............63  
Adjusting telescoping  
General notes on the  
central locking system ...............23  
steering column ..........................65  
Central locking system ...................24  
Remote control .............................24  
Panic button ..................................26  
Mechanical keys ...........................27  
Doors ..................................................28  
Central locking switch ....................30  
Automatic central locking .............. 31  
Rear view mirrors ............................66  
Instrument cluster ...........................70  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........77  
Checking engine oil level ..............79  
Engine oil consumption ..................80  
warning system ............................ 45  
BabySmartTM airbag  
deactivation system ....................51  
Self-test BabySmartTM without  
special child seat installed ..........51 Exterior lamp switch ....................... 81  
Supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) ............................................. 52  
Emergency tensioning retractor  
(ETR) ............................................. 53  
Headlamp cleaning system ............82  
Combination switch ........................83  
Hazard warning flasher switch .....85  
Climate control .................................86  
Emergency unlocking in  
case of accident ...........................32  
Trunk .................................................33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear window defroster ....................90 Interior ............................................. 113 Parcel net in passenger footwell ..118  
Audio and telephone, operation ....93 Cup holder and glove box .............114 Shelf behind roll bars .....................118  
Power windows ................................111 Storage compartments ................... 115 Cellular telephone ..........................118  
Interior lighting ............................. 112 Ashtrays ...........................................116 Garage door opener ........................119  
Night security illumination ......... 112 Coin Holder .....................................116 Retractable hardtop .......................122  
Sun visors with Vanity Mirror ......113 Lighter ..............................................117 Wind screen ....................................127  
Luggage cover .................................128  
Contents - Operation  
21  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Vehicle keys  
22  
Remote control with folding master key  
Included with your vehicle are 2 remote controls with  
folding master keys.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do  
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or  
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised  
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious  
personal injury.  
1
The remote control operates all locks on the vehicle.  
To release the key, press button (1). The key unfolds  
from the holder by itself.  
The transmitter for the remote control is located in the  
key holder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Obtaining replacement keys  
General notes on the central locking system  
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking  
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.  
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be  
obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
If the key in the steering lock is in position 2, the  
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote  
control.  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:  
Check the batteries of the remote control,  
Start lock-out  
Important!  
see page 236.  
Synchronize the remote control, see page 237.  
Removing the key from the steering lock activates the  
start lock-out. The engine cannot be started.  
Turning the key in the steering lock to position 2  
deactivates the start lock-out.  
Note:  
In case the engine cannot be started, and Á and  
î are shown in the odometer display field, the  
system is not operational. Contact an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in  
the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).  
Central locking system  
23  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Central locking system  
24  
Remote control  
Due to the extended operational range of the remote  
control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or  
unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button.  
The vehicle doors, trunk, storage compartment in  
armrest, and fuel filler flap can be centrally locked and  
unlocked via remote control.  
1 Transmit button  
Locking  
Œ Unlocking  
2 PANIC button  
3 Release button for master key  
4 Transmitter eye and lamp for battery check  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking and unlocking with remote control  
If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote  
control, neither door is opened, the key is not inserted  
in the steering lock, or the central locking switch is not  
activated, the vehicle will automatically lock.  
Unlocking:  
Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink  
once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked.  
Locking:  
The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of  
unlocking modes (see below):  
Press transmit button once. All turn signal lamps  
blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked.  
Selective unlocking mode –  
If the turn signal lamps do not blink, a door or trunk is  
not closed properly.  
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door,  
storage compartment in armrest, and fuel filler flap.  
Press transmit button Œ twice to unlock both doors,  
storage compartment in armrest, fuel filler flap, and  
trunk.  
Note:  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing  
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change  
the batteries in the remote control (if ok, battery check  
lamp in transmitter will light briefly when transmitting)  
or to synchronize the remote control, see page 236  
and 237.  
Global unlocking mode –  
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock both doors,  
storage compartment in armrest, fuel filler flap, and  
trunk.  
Notes:  
Choosing global or selective mode on remote control  
The presently active unlocking mode (selective or  
global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle  
with the remote control (see below for changing mode).  
Press and hold transmit buttons and Œ  
simultaneously for five seconds to reprogram the  
remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times  
indicating the completed mode change.  
Central locking system  
25  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Panic button  
26  
Note:  
For operation in the USA only: This device complies  
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
1
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void  
to the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one  
second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps  
will operate for approximately 3 minutes.  
To deactivate press button (1) again, or turn key in  
steering lock to position 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical keys  
Notes:  
Use of the key does not operate the central locking  
system or arm or disarm the antitheft alarm system.  
The mechanical keys fit all locks on the vehicle.  
Remove the protective cap from the driver’s door lock  
before inserting the mechanical key into the lock.  
The alarm sounds when unlocking the door. Cancel  
alarm by turning key in steering lock to position 1, or  
with the remote control by pressing button Œ  
or .  
Central locking system  
27  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Doors  
28  
1 Opening – pull handle  
The entire vehicle may be locked or unlocked by either  
using the master key in driver’s door or trunk locks, or  
central locking switch located in center console. The  
master key also locks or unlocks the storage  
2 Unlocking  
3 Locking  
compartment in the armrest, and the fuel filler flap.  
4 Individual door from inside:  
Push lock button down to lock.  
Pull inside door handle to unlock.  
Note:  
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 244.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you lock the vehicle, both door lock buttons  
should move down. If any one stays up, the respective  
door is not properly closed.  
Notes:  
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  
the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.  
You should then unlock the vehicle, open and reclose  
this door, and lock the vehicle again. Each individual  
door can be locked with the respective door lock button  
– the driver’s door can only be locked when it is closed.  
To lock, turn key in driver’s door lock to position 3 or  
push down lock buttons.  
To unlock, turn key in driver’s door lock to position 2 or  
pull inside door handles.  
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the  
outside, only the door being opened from the inside will  
unlock, and the alarm will come on. The other door, the  
trunk, the storage compartment in armrest, and fuel  
filler flap remain locked.  
Central locking system  
29  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Central locking switch  
30  
The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central  
locking switch, if both doors are closed.  
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote  
control or key, the doors and trunk cannot be unlocked  
with the central locking switch.  
1
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central  
locking switch, while in the selective remote control  
mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.  
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central  
locking switch, while in the global remote control mode,  
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened  
from the inside.  
2
P54.25-2225-26  
Note:  
1 Locking  
The storage compartment in the armrest as well as the  
fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the  
central locking switch.  
2 Unlocking  
The central locking switch is located in the center  
console.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic central locking  
Notes:  
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch  
after activating the automatic central locking, and  
neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked  
even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph  
(15 km/h) or more.  
The central locking switch also operates the automatic  
central locking.  
With the automatic central locking system activated, the  
doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of  
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler  
flap and the storage compartment in the armrest remain  
unlocked.  
If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of  
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the  
automatic central locking activated, the door will again  
be automatically locked at speeds of approximately  
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.  
To activate:  
With key in steering lock position 2 hold upper portion  
of switch (1) for a minimum of 5 seconds.  
Important!  
When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a  
dynamometer test stand, please, note the following:  
To deactivate:  
With key in steering lock position 2 hold lower portion  
of switch (2) for a minimum of 5 seconds.  
With the automatic central locking activated and the  
key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle doors will  
lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear  
wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph  
(15 km/h) or more.  
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,  
deactivate the automatic central locking.  
Central locking system  
31  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
32  
Emergency unlocking in case of accident  
The doors unlock automatically a short time after a  
strong deceleration is detected, such as in a collision  
(this is intended to aid rescue and exit). However, the  
key must still be in the steering lock.  
Driving on rough roads may cause the vehicle to unlock.  
If necessary, the vehicle can be locked again with the  
central locking switch, see page 30.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trunk  
0
2
1
4
3
P88.50-2065-26  
P72.20-2045-26  
3 Lock  
4 Recessed handle  
Pull handle to open the trunk lid.  
The lock is located next to the recessed handle.  
0 Neutral position – remove key in this position.  
1 Unlocking  
Now open trunk using recessed handle (4).  
2 Locking (complete vehicle)  
Central locking system  
33  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
34  
Notes:  
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  
the trunk can be locked and unlocked individually.  
To lock, turn key to position 2.  
To unlock, turn key to position 1.  
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 244.  
Important!  
Do not place key inside trunk, since trunk is locked  
when the lid is closed if the vehicle has been previously  
centrally locked.  
Lower trunk lid using handle (5) and close it with hands  
placed flat on edges on trunk lid. Please remember to  
keep your fingers out of the space between the lid and  
the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency release for trunk lid  
Antitheft alarm system  
1
P54.25-2226-26  
1 Indicator lamp in switch located on center console  
The handle for the trunk lid lock emergency release is  
located in the trunk lid.  
To open lid, pull lever (1) in direction of arrow.  
Note:  
The antitheft alarm system is triggered when opening  
the trunk from inside if vehicle was previously centrally  
locked.  
Antitheft alarm system  
35  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Antitheft alarm system  
36  
The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed  
with the remote control or any of your vehicle’s keys by  
locking or unlocking the vehicle.  
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of  
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will  
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the  
activating element (a door, for example) is immediately  
closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds,  
an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele  
Aid on page 132.  
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately  
10 seconds after locking the vehicle.  
A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed.  
Operation:  
Note:  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when  
someone:  
We recommend that you carry the flat key with you and  
keep it in a safe place (e.g. your wallet) so that it is  
always handy. Never leave the flat key in the vehicle.  
opens a door,  
When you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical  
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will  
sound.  
opens the trunk,  
opens the hood,  
To cancel the alarm, insert the key in the steering lock  
opens the glove box,  
attempts to raise the vehicle.  
or press transmit button Œ or on the key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tow-away alarm  
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of  
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will  
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the  
vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm,  
insert the key in the steering lock or press transmit  
button Œ or on the key.  
1
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an  
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid  
on page 132.  
2
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch  
off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or  
when parking on a surface subject to movement, such  
as a ferry or auto train.  
P54.25-2227-26  
To do so, turn key in steering lock to position 0 or 1, or  
remove key from steering lock. Press tow-away alarm  
switch (1). The indicator lamp (2) illuminates briefly.  
The switch is located on the center console.  
1 Press to switch off  
Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with key or remote  
control.  
2 Indicator lamp  
The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the  
vehicle is locked again with key or remote control, at  
which time it is automatically reactivated.  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when  
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.  
Tow-away alarm  
37  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
38  
Power seats  
Warning!  
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head  
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help  
reduce injuries during an accident.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle.  
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.  
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the  
driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
The power seats can also be operated with driver’s  
or passenger door open. Do not leave children  
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an  
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle  
equipment may cause serious personal injury.  
Never place hands under seat or near any moving  
parts while a seat is being adjusted.  
For your protection, drive only with properly  
positioned head restraints.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the  
head approximately at ear level.  
To operate the power seat adjustment switches, turn key  
in steering lock to position 1 or 2 (with a door open, the  
power seats can also be operated with the key removed  
or in steering lock position 0).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We recommend to adjust the seats in the following  
order:  
4
1 Seat, up/down  
Press the switch (up/down direction) until  
comfortable seating position with still sufficient  
headroom is reached.  
1
3
2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft  
Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a  
comfortable seating position is reached that still  
allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal  
safely. The position should be as far rearward as  
possible, consistent with ability to properly operate  
controls.  
2
2
P91.29-2105-26  
The switches are located on each seat.  
3 Seat cushion tilt  
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  
your legs are lightly supported.  
4 Backrest tilt  
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  
your arms are slightly angled when holding the  
steering wheel.  
Seats  
39  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
40  
For removal or installation of head restraint, first open  
the roof.  
Removal:  
Pull head restraint to its highest position. Push  
button (6) and pull head restraint out.  
5
Installation:  
6
Insert the head restraint and push it down to the stop.  
Adjust head restraint to the desired position.  
Warning!  
For your protection, drive only with properly  
positioned head restraints.  
P91.16-2052-26  
5 Head restraint height  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the  
head approximately at ear level.  
6 Head restraint release  
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head  
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help  
reduce injuries during an accident.  
Head restraint height  
Raising:  
Pull up on head restraint.  
Caution!  
Lowering:  
Do not remove head restraints except when mounting  
seat covers. Whenever restraints have been removed be  
sure to reinstall them before driving.  
Push down on head restraint.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head  
approximately at ear level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be  
adjusted for adequate rearward vision.  
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should adjust  
the seat height for proper vision as well as fore/aft  
placement and backrest angle to insure adequate  
control, reach, operation, and comfort. The head  
restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See  
also airbag section for proper seat positioning.  
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be  
seated in a properly secured restraint system that  
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213.1.  
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel and rear view  
mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts  
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.  
In addition also adjust the steering wheel to ensure  
adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort.  
Seats  
41  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
42  
Seat heater (optional)  
Press switch to turn on seat heater:  
1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in  
the switch lights up.  
2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in  
the switch light up. After approximately 5 minutes  
in the rapid seat heating mode, the seat heater  
automatically switches to normal operation and only  
one indicator lamp will stay on.  
1
Turning off seat heater:  
2
If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch.  
If both indicator lamps are on, press lower half of  
switch.  
P54.25-2036-26  
The seat heater switches are located in the center  
console.  
If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after  
approximately 30 minutes of operation.  
The seat heaters can be switched on with the key in  
steering lock positions 1 or 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large  
amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the  
seat heater longer than necessary.  
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too  
many power consumers are switched on at the same  
time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,  
the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both  
indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode).  
The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as  
soon as sufficient voltage is available.  
If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to  
you, the seat heaters can be switched off.  
Seats  
43  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
44  
Seat belts and integrated restraint system  
Your vehicle is equipped with lap-shoulder seat belts,  
emergency tensioning retractors for the seat belts, front  
and side airbags for driver and passenger, as well as a  
knee bolster for the driver’s seat.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag  
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will  
be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash.  
If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.  
Seat belts  
Important!  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require  
seat belt use.  
All states and provinces require use of child restraints  
that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213.  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in  
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-  
shoulder belt.  
Note:  
For your safety and that of your passenger we strongly  
recommend their use.  
For cleaning and care of the seat belts, see page 252.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat belt nonusage warning system  
Warning!  
With the key in steering lock position 2, a warning  
sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt is not  
fastened.  
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there  
are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in  
the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate  
seat belt.  
Warning!  
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position  
your seat belt greatly increases your risk of  
injuries and their likely severity in an accident.  
You and your passenger should always wear seat  
belts.  
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be  
considerably more severe without your seat belt  
properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled,  
you are much more likely to hit the interior of the  
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously  
injured or killed.  
In the same crash, the possibility for injury or  
death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt.  
Restraint systems  
45  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
46  
Fastening of seat belts  
Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not  
twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury.  
To help avoid severe or fatal injuries, the lap belt should  
be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not  
across the abdomen.  
1
Warning!  
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.  
Always make sure your passenger is properly  
restrained.  
3
2
P91.40-2058-26  
1 Latch plate  
2 Buckle  
3 Release button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder  
portion up.  
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled  
snug and checked for snugness immediately after  
attaching it.  
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as  
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it  
should not touch the neck).  
Caution!  
For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or seat back  
into positions which could affect the correct seat belt  
positioning.  
Note:  
For cleaning and care of the seat belts, see cleaning and  
care of the vehicle on page 252.  
Restraint systems  
47  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
48  
Unfastening of seat belts  
The locking function of the reel may be checked by  
quickly pulling out the belt.  
Warning!  
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY.  
• Seat belts can only work when used properly.  
Never wear seat belts in any other way than as  
described in this section, as that could result  
in serious injuries in case of an accident.  
• Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all  
times, because seat belts help reduce the  
likelihood of and potential severity of injuries  
in accidents, including rollovers. The  
integrated restraint system includes “SRS”  
(driver airbag, passenger airbag, door mounted  
side impact airbags), “ETR” (seat belt  
emergency tensioning retractors), and driver  
knee bolster. The system is designed to  
Push the release button (3) in the belt buckle (2).  
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by  
guiding the latch plate (1).  
enhance the protection offered to properly  
belted occupants in certain frontal (front  
airbags) and side (side impact airbags) impacts  
which exceed preset deployment thresholds.  
Operation  
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during  
sudden vehicle stops or when quickly pulling on the  
belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your  
hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is  
positioned across your abdomen, it can cause  
serious injuries in a crash.  
• Each seat belt must never be used for more  
than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat  
belt around a person and another person or  
other objects.  
• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable  
objects in or on your clothing, such as  
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might  
cause injuries.  
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash,  
you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to  
manage impact forces. The twisted belt against  
your body could cause injuries.  
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm,  
against you neck or off your shoulder. In a  
crash, your body would move too far forward.  
That would increase the chance of head and  
neck injuries. The belt would also apply too  
much force to the ribs or abdomen, which  
could severely injure internal organs such as  
your liver or spleen.  
• Pregnant women should also use a lap-  
shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be  
positioned as low as possible on the hips to  
avoid pressure on the abdomen.  
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel  
or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the  
floor in front of the seat.  
Restraint systems  
49  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
50  
Warning!  
USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag  
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will  
be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash.  
If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.  
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible  
rearward from the dashboard when the seat is  
occupied.  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system  
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for  
installation of special child seats.  
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed  
for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at  
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for  
use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.  
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if  
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.  
Please be sure to check the indicator every time  
you use the special system child seat. Should the  
light go out while the restraint is installed, please  
check installation. If the light remains out, do not  
use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children  
on the passenger seat until the system has been  
repaired.  
With the special child seat properly installed, the  
passenger front airbag will not deploy. The 7  
indicator lamp located on the center console will be  
illuminated, except with key removed or in steering lock  
position 0. The system does not deactivate the door  
mounted side impact airbag.  
Self-test BabySmartTM  
without special child seat installed  
Warning!  
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will  
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to  
operate with it. It will not work with child seats  
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.  
After turning key in steering lock to position 1 or 2, the  
7 indicator lamp located on the center console  
comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then  
extinguishes.  
Never place anything between seat cushion and  
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the  
effectiveness of the deactivation system. The  
bottom of the child seat must make full contact  
with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly  
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the  
child in case of an accident instead of protecting  
the child.  
If the indicator lamp should not come on or is  
continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must  
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating  
any child on the passenger seat.  
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.  
Restraint systems  
51  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
52  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)  
Seat belt fastened  
Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts.  
Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus  
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were  
designed to operate, and do not afford any protection  
whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not  
designed to deploy.  
first threshold exceeded:  
ETR activates  
second threshold exceeded:  
airbag also activates  
Seat belt not fastened  
The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to  
activate either the Emergency Tensioning Retractor  
(ETR) or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the  
direction and severity of the impact exceeding the  
preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.  
first threshold exceeded:  
airbag activates, but not ETR  
Driver and passenger systems operate independently of  
each other.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)  
In cases of other frontal impacts, roll-overs, certain side  
impacts, rear collisions or other accidents without  
sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency  
tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver  
and passenger will then be protected by the fastened  
seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.  
The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning  
retractors. These tensioning retractors are located in  
each belt’s inertia reel and become operationally ready  
with the key in steering lock position 1 or 2.  
The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to  
activate only when the seat belts are fastened during  
frontal and front-angled impacts and rear impacts  
exceeding the first threshold of the SRS and in rear  
impacts exceeding a preset severity level. They remove  
slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit  
more snugly against the body restricting its forward  
movement as much as possible.  
For seat belt and emergency tensioning retractor safety  
guidelines see page 61.  
Note:  
The passenger ETR activates only if the passenger seat  
is occupied.  
Heavy objects on the passenger seat can appear to the  
“SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that  
seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy  
and the ETR to activate in a crash exceeding the  
appropriate treshhold.  
Restraint systems  
53  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
54  
Airbags  
2
1
5
4
3
2
EC  
1
0
D
D
Y
T
T
5
EC  
0
P91.60-2212-26  
P91.60-2211-26  
1 Driver airbag  
The driver airbag is located in the steering wheel hub.  
2 Passenger airbag  
The passenger airbag is located in the dashboard ahead  
of the passenger.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver  
and passenger airbags can provide increased protection  
for the driver and passenger in certain frontal impacts  
exceeding preset thresholds.  
Door mounted side impact airbags can provide  
increased protection to belted occupants on the  
impacted side of the vehicle in side impacts exceeding  
its preset thresholds.  
The operational readiness of the airbag system is  
verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument  
cluster when turning the key in steering lock to  
position 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out  
after approximately 4 seconds: after the lamp goes out,  
the system continues to monitor the components and  
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  
malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp does not  
come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after  
3 Side impact airbag  
The side impact airbags are located in the doors.  
The most effective occupant restraint system yet  
developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt.  
In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat  
belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.  
approximately 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a  
malfunction in the system has been detected.  
Restraint systems  
55  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
56  
The following system components are monitored or  
undergo a selfcheck: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition  
circuits, seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning  
retractors, seat sensor.  
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated  
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be  
operational. For your safety, we strongly  
recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-  
Benz Center immediately to have the system  
checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be activated  
when needed in an accident, which could result in  
serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy  
unexpectedly and unnecessary which could also  
result in injury.  
Initially, when the key is turned from steering lock  
position 0 to positions 1 or 2, malfunctions in the crash-  
sensor are detected and indicated (the “SRS” indicator  
lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does not come  
on). In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp  
has gone out following the initial check, interruptions or  
short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the  
driver and passenger seat belt buckle harnesses, and  
low voltage in the entire system are detected and  
indicated.  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front airbags  
Side impact airbags  
The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to  
activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a  
preset threshold.  
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in  
certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only  
the side impact airbag on the impacted side of the  
vehicle deploys.  
The passenger front airbag deploys only if the  
passenger seat is occupied, and the 7 indicator lamp  
on the center console is not illuminated.  
The side impact airbag for the passenger deploys only if  
the passenger seat is occupied.  
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a  
properly positioned and fastened seat belt.  
Note:  
Heavy objects on the passenger seat can cause the  
passenger front airbag to deploy in a crash.  
Note:  
Heavy objects on the passenger seat can appear to the  
“SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that  
seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy  
in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.  
Restraint systems  
57  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
58  
Important!  
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain  
frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact  
airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds.  
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of  
injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,  
and side (side impact airbags) impacts which may  
cause significant injuries, however, no system  
available today can totally eliminate injuries and  
fatalities.  
Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient  
severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will  
they provide their supplemental protection.  
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a  
small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust,  
however, is neither injurious to your health, nor  
does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might  
cause some temporary breathing difficulty for  
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To  
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as  
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing  
difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the  
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a  
window or door.  
The driver and passenger must always wear their  
seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags  
to provide their intended supplemental protection.  
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts,  
roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or  
other accidents in which the airbags are not  
designed to deploy, the airbags will not be activated.  
The driver and passenger will then be protected by  
the fastened seat belts.  
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the  
airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags  
which are designed to activate in certain impacts  
exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential  
and severity of injury. It is important to your safety  
and that of your passenger that you replace deployed  
airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to  
ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash  
protection for occupants.  
• Sit properly belted in an upright position with  
your back against the backrest.  
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible  
rearward, still permitting proper operation of  
vehicle controls. The distance from the center  
of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the  
airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at  
least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be  
able to accomplish this by a combination of  
adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If  
you have any problems, please see your  
Warning!  
To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags  
inflate, it is very important for the driver and  
passenger to always be in a properly seated  
position and to wear their seat belts.  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the  
steering wheel or dashboard.  
For maximum protection in the event of a collision  
always be in normal seated position with your back  
against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and  
ensure that it is properly positioned on the body.  
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel  
rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim  
can increase the risk and potential severity of  
hand/arm injury when the driver front airbag  
inflates.  
Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed  
and force, a proper seating and hands on steering  
wheel position will help to keep you at a safe  
distance from the airbag. Occupants who are  
unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag  
can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates  
with great force in the blink of an eye:  
• Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible  
rearward from the dashboard when the seat is  
occupied.  
Restraint systems  
59  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
60  
• Occupants, especially children, should never  
lean their heads in the area of the door where  
the side airbag inflates. This could result in  
serious injuries or death should the airbag be  
triggered. Always sit upright, properly use the  
seatbelts and appropriate size infant or child  
restraint system  
Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or  
under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle,  
you must properly use a BabySmartTM child  
restraint. A BabySmartTM child restraint will turn  
off the passenger side front airbag. BabySmartTM  
will not, however, turn off the side impact airbag.  
It should be noted that there is a possibility for a  
side airbag related injury if occupants, especially  
children, are not properly seated or restrained  
when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy  
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.  
• Children 12 years old and under must never  
ride in this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz  
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,  
which operates with the BabySmartTM system  
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the  
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow  
these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially  
children, should never place their bodies or lean  
their heads in the area of the door where the side  
airbag inflates. This could result in serious  
injuries or death should the side airbag be  
activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the  
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or  
child restraint system for all children 12 years old  
or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.  
passenger front airbag when it is properly  
installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the  
airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this  
happens, serious or fatal injury can result.  
Failure to follow these instructions can result in  
severe or fatal injuries to you or other occupants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you believe that, even with the use of these  
guidelines, it would be safer for your front  
passenger seat occupant to have the passenger side  
door mounted side airbag deactivated, then  
deactivation can be accomplished upon your  
written election to do so at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please  
contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center or call our Client Assistance Center at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.  
• Airbags and ETR’s are designed to function on  
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency  
tensioning retractor (ETR) that was activated  
must be replaced.  
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges.  
• Do not make any modification that could  
change the effectiveness of the belts.  
• No modifications of any kind may be made to  
any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This  
includes changing or removing any component  
or part of the “SRS”, the installation of  
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor and airbag  
additional trim material, badges etc. over the  
steering wheel hub, passenger airbag cover, or  
door trim panels, and installation of additional  
electrical/electronic equipment on or near  
“SRS” components and wiring. Keep area  
between airbags and occupants free of objects  
(e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).  
Warning!  
• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly  
stressed in an accident must be replaced and  
their anchoring points must also be checked.  
Use only belts installed or supplied by an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Restraint systems  
61  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
62  
• An airbag system component within the  
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has  
inflated. Do not touch.  
• For your protection and the protection of  
others, when scrapping the airbag unit or  
emergency tensioning retractor, our safety  
instructions must be followed. These  
instructions are available at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
• Improper work on the system, including  
incorrect installation and removal, can lead to  
possible injury through an unintended  
activation of the “SRS”.  
• Given the considerable deployment speed and  
the textile structure of the airbags, there is the  
possibility of abrasions or other injuries  
resulting from airbag deployment.  
• In addition, through improper work there is  
the risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or  
causing unintended airbag deployment. Work  
on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed  
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
When you sell the vehicle we strongly urge you to give  
notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with  
an “SRS” by alerting him to the applicable section in the  
Operator’s Manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Infant and child restraint systems  
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child restraint in  
this vehicle.  
Warning!  
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is  
in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will  
be deactivated.  
We recommend that all infants and children be properly  
restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion.  
Important!  
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special seat belt  
retractor for secure fastening of a child restraint.  
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in  
all 50 states and all Canadian provinces.  
To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint  
instructions for routing. Then pull shoulder belt out  
completely and let it retract. During the seat belt  
retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate  
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt  
is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up  
any slack.  
Infants and small children should be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly  
secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with  
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of  
compliance with this standard can be found on the  
instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction  
manual provided with the restraint.  
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt  
retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in  
the usual manner.  
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure  
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s  
instructions for installation and use.  
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside  
of vehicle and to infant or child restraint.  
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.  
Restraint systems  
63  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
64  
Warning!  
Children too big for child restraint systems should  
use regular seat belts. Position the shoulder belt  
across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A  
booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper  
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to the  
point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly  
without one.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag  
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will  
be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash.  
If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result.  
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it  
from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to  
prevent the child restraint from becoming a  
projectile in the event of an accident.  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle;  
even if the children are secured in a child restraint  
system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint  
system may use vehicle equipment and may cause  
serious personal injury.  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
Infants and small children should never share a  
seat belt with another occupant. During an  
accident, they could be crushed between the  
occupant and seat belt.  
USA Models only:  
Since 1986 all U.S. child restraints comply with U.S.  
regulations without the use of a tether strap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting telescoping steering column  
Warning!  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The  
telescoping adjustment must be locked while  
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while  
driving, or driving without the telescoping  
adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose  
control of the vehicle.  
Important!  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. It should go  
out when the engine is running.  
1
If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, the adjustable steering column is not locked  
properly.  
P46.15-2031-26  
Unlocking:  
Pull handle (1) out to its stop. The indicator lamp,  
located in the instrument cluster, comes on.  
Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked  
the steering column.  
Adjusting:  
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull out or  
push in steering wheel.  
Locking:  
Push handle (1) in until it engages. The indicator lamp,  
located in the instrument cluster, goes out.  
Adjusting telescoping steering column  
65  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Rear view mirrors  
Rear view mirrors  
66  
Note:  
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if  
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the  
inside rear view mirror.  
Inside rear view mirror  
Manually adjust the inside rear view mirror.  
The automatic antiglare function will not react for  
example, if the wind screen is installed.  
Use your inside rear view mirror to determine the size  
and distance of objects seen in the passenger-side  
exterior mirror.  
Warning!  
Inside rear view mirror, antiglare mode  
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  
breaks.  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the mirror  
reflection brightness responds to changes in light  
sensitivity.  
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the  
liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin,  
clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does,  
immediately flush affected area with water, and  
seek medical help if necessary.  
With gear selector lever (manual transmission: gearshift  
lever) in position “R”, or with the interior lamp switched  
on, the mirror brightness does not respond to changes  
in light sensitivity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior rear view mirrors  
Exterior rear view mirror adjustment  
Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
First select the mirror to be adjusted – turn switch:  
1 Left mirror  
2 Right mirror  
To adjust, toggle the switch forward, backward or to  
either side.  
Notes:  
The exterior mirrors have electrically heated glass. The  
heater switches on automatically, depending on outside  
temperature.  
P68.20-2167-26  
The switch is located on the center console.  
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its  
normal position, it must be repositioned by applying  
firm pressure until it snaps into place.  
Warning!  
Exercise care when using the passenger-side  
exterior mirror. The passenger-side exterior mirror  
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider  
field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than  
they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or  
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  
Rear view mirrors  
67  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Rear view mirrors  
68  
Driver’ s side exterior rear view mirror, antiglare  
mode  
Note:  
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if  
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the  
inside rear view mirror.  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the driver’s  
side mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in  
light sensitivity.  
The automatic antiglare function will not react for  
example, if the wind screen is installed.  
With gear selector lever (manual transmission: gearshift  
lever) in position “R”, or with the interior lamp switched  
on, the driver’s side mirror brightness does not respond  
to changes in light sensitivity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Warning!  
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle  
paint finish can only be completely removed while in  
their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.  
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  
breaks.  
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the  
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,  
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately  
flush affected area with water, and seek medical  
help if necessary.  
Rear view mirrors  
69  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Instrument cluster  
70  
6
5
7
8
12  
1
2
9
14 13  
10  
3
11  
4
P54.30-4495-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 75  
7 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see combination  
switch on page 83  
2 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement  
warning lamp, see page 185  
8 Speedometer  
3 Outside temperature indicator, see page 75  
9 Trip odometer, see page 76  
4 Push button for activating the instrument cluster,  
intensity of instrument lamps, for trip odometer, and  
for Flexible service system (FSS) indicator, see  
pages 74, 76 and 77  
10 Main odometer, Flexible service system (FSS)  
indicator, see page 77  
11 Push button for setting clock, see page 76  
12 Tachometer, see page 76  
5 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination  
switch on page 83  
13 Clock, see page 76  
6 Electronic stability program (ESP) warning lamp,  
14 Gear range indicator display, see selector lever  
system is adjusting to road conditions, see page 185  
position, page 150  
Notes:  
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,  
see page 72  
Instrument cluster  
71  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
72  
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster  
Brake pads worn down, see page 184  
High beam  
Battery not being charged properly,  
see page 188  
ABS malfunction, see page 186  
ABS  
Exterior lamp failure, see page 189  
Brake fluid low (except Canada).  
Parking brake engaged, see page 183  
Telescoping steering column not locked,  
see page 186  
Brake fluid low (Canada only).  
Parking brake engaged, see page 183  
SRS malfunction, see page 184  
BAS malfunction, see page 185  
ESP malfunction, see page 185  
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the  
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator  
lamp comes on when the engine is running,  
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel  
management system, emission control  
system, systems which impact emissions, or  
the fuel cap is not closed tight. In all cases,  
we recommend that you have the  
ESP warning lamp. Adjust driving to road  
condition, see page 185  
Fasten seat belts, see page 184  
Fluid level for windshield and headlamp  
washer system low, see page 187  
malfunction checked as soon as possible, see  
page 182  
Coolant level low, see page 187  
Engine oil level low, see page 188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function indicator lamp on the center console  
Additional function indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display)  
Front passenger airbag automatically  
AIRBAG  
OFF  
switched off, see page 190  
FSS indicator (distance, Service A),  
see page 77  
FSS indicator (distance, Service B),  
see page 77  
FSS indicator (days, Service A),  
see page 77  
FSS indicator (days, Service B),  
see page 77  
The symbols appear in the main odometer display field  
prior to the next suggested service. Depending on  
operating conditions throughout the year, the next  
service is calculated and displayed in days or distance  
remaining. See page 77 for notes on the flexible service  
system (FSS).  
Instrument cluster  
73  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
74  
Activating the instrument cluster  
Instrument lamps  
Rotate adjusting knob (1) to vary intensity of instrument  
lamps.  
Display illumination  
Press adjusting knob (1) to briefly illuminate the display  
(with key removed or in steering lock position 0 or 1).  
1
P54.30-4499-26  
The instrument cluster is activated by:  
Opening the door.  
Pressing button (1) on the instrument cluster.  
Turning the key in steering lock to position 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Coolant temperature gauge  
Outside temperature indicator  
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city  
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red  
marking.  
The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper  
area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by  
road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This  
means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature  
can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer  
placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external  
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).  
The engine should not be operated with the coolant  
temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause  
serious engine damage which is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Adaptation to ambient temperature takes place in steps  
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stop-  
and-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of  
temperature change.  
Warning!  
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated  
can cause some fluids which may have leaked  
into the engine compartment to catch fire. You  
could be seriously burned.  
Warning!  
The outside temperature indicator is not designed  
to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore  
unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated  
temperatures just above the freezing point do not  
guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.  
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause  
serious burns and can occur just by opening  
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if  
you see or hear steam coming from it.  
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do  
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.  
Instrument cluster  
75  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Trip odometer  
76  
Clock  
Adjusting clock:  
Hour: Pull out knob (2) and turn it to the left.  
Minute: Pull out knob (2) and turn it to the right.  
Tachometer  
The red marking on tachometer denotes excessive  
engine speed.  
Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious  
engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-  
Benz Limited Warranty.  
1
2
P54.30-4498-26  
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted  
if the engine is operated within the red marking.  
To reset:  
Press button (1) once (with key in steering lock  
position 2).  
Press button (1) twice (with key removed or in  
steering lock position 0 or 1).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flexible service system (FSS)  
(service indicator)  
The symbols 9 or ´ indicate the type of service  
to be performed:  
9 Service A  
´ Service B  
The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds  
when turning the key in steering lock to position 2, or  
while driving when reaching the service warning  
threshold. It can be canceled manually by pressing  
button (1).  
Once the suggested term has passed, the message plus  
symbol 9 or ´ preceded by a (minus symbol)  
blinks for approximately 30 seconds and a signal  
sounds every time when turning the key in steering lock  
to position 2.  
1
P54.30-4499-26  
The FSS display can also be called up for approximately  
10 seconds with display illuminated by pressing  
button (1) twice within 1 second.  
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is  
directly related to the operating conditions of the  
vehicle.  
Following a completed A or B service the  
Mercedes-Benz Center sets the counter to 10 000 miles  
(Canada: 15 000 km).  
The symbol 9 or ´ appears in the main odometer  
display field prior to the next suggested service.  
Depending on operating conditions throughout the year,  
the next service is calculated and displayed in days  
š or distance 9 remaining.  
Flexible service system  
77  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Flexible service system  
78  
The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:  
Note:  
When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more  
days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such  
days not counted by FSS can be added by your  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
1. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
2. Within 1 second press button (1) twice.  
3. The present status for days or distance is displayed.  
Within 10 seconds turn key in steering lock to  
position 0.  
The interval between services is determined by the kind  
of vehicle operation. Driving at extreme speeds, and  
cold starts combined with short distance driving in  
which the engine does not reach normal operating  
temperature, reduce the interval between services.  
4. Press and hold button (1), while turning key in  
steering lock to position 2 again. The present status  
for days or distance is displayed once more.  
Continue to hold button (1).  
However you choose to set your reference numbers, the  
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet  
must be followed to properly care for your vehicle.  
After approximately 10 seconds a signal sounds, and  
the display shows 10 000 miles  
(Canada: 15 000 km) for approximately 10 seconds.  
5. Release button (1).  
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a  
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking engine oil level  
(SLK 320 and SLK 32 AMG only)  
Within 1 second press left button on the instrument  
cluster twice.  
The following messages are available:  
“OK”  
“-1.0 Q” (Canada: -1.0 L)  
“-1.5 Q” (Canada: -1.5 L)  
“-2.0 Q” (Canada: -2.0 L)  
If the message “-2.0 Q” (Canada: -2.0 L) blinks and a  
signal sounds, add oil according to amount displayed.  
See page 197 for instructions on adding engine oil.  
“HI”  
P54.30-4497-29  
The message “HI” blinks and a signal sounds.  
Do not overfill the engine.  
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level  
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.  
Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could  
cause damage to engine and catalytic converter not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after turning  
off the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil  
pan.  
The symbol I flashes in the odometer display field if  
a proper oil level check cannot be performed.  
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2 and  
wait until the symbols : and I appear in the  
odometer display field.  
The oil level check can be repeated after a short time.  
Checking engine oil level  
79  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Checking engine oil level  
80  
Perform the oil level check with the dipstick, if it cannot  
be completed via the odometer display field. In this case  
we recommend that you have the system checked at a  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Engine oil consumption  
Engine oil consumption checks should only be made  
after the break-in period. During the break-in period,  
higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal.  
Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in  
increased consumption.  
Notes:  
If the symbols : and I are continuously  
illuminated after pressing left button on the instrument  
cluster twice and there is no change in the odometer  
display field or the low engine oil level warning lamp  
comes on, a malfunction has occurred to the system.  
Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick.  
If no oil leaks are noted continue to drive to the nearest  
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the system checked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior lamp switch  
Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking  
lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green  
indicator in lamp switch comes on.  
Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in  
addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in  
lamp switch comes on.  
Standing lamps  
When the vehicle is parked on the street the standing  
lamps (right or left side parking lamps) can be turned  
on, making the vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.  
The standing lamps cannot be operated with the key in  
steering lock position 2.  
P82.10-2476-26  
Notes:  
D Off  
With the key removed and a door open, a warning  
sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing  
lamps) are not switched off.  
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps,  
license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)  
Canada only: When the engine is running, the low  
beam is additionally switched on.  
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or  
the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be  
used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult  
your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations  
regarding allowable lamp operation.  
B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam  
headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).  
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)  
Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)  
Exterior lamp switch  
81  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamp switch  
82  
Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the  
Headlamp cleaning system  
exterior lamp switch is turned to position D.  
Daytime running lamps (Canada only)  
Vehicles with automatic transmission:  
When the engine is running and the selector lever is in  
a driving position, the low beam headlamps (includes  
parking lamps, side marker lamps, taillamps and  
license plate lamps) are automatically switched on.  
When shifting from a driving position to position “N”  
or “P”, the low beam switches off (2 seconds delay).  
P82.15-2007-26  
Vehicles with manual transmission:  
The switch is located in the center console.  
With the engine running, the low beam headlamps  
(includes parking lamps, side marker lamps, taillamps  
and license plate lamps) are automatically switched on.  
The headlamp washer can be activated with the key in  
steering lock position 2.  
For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should  
be turned to position B to permit activation of the  
high beam headlamps.  
Briefly press symbol side of switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Combination switch  
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing  
lanes on a highway, move combination switch to the  
point of resistance only and hold it there.  
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the  
combination switch past the point of resistance (up or  
down). The switch is automatically canceled when the  
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.  
4
4
2
Turn signal failure  
If one of the turn signal lamps fails, the turn signal  
indicator system flashes and sounds at a faster than  
normal rate.  
1
3
5
5
P54.25-2302-26  
1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position B)  
2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position B)  
3 High beam flasher (high beam available  
independent of exterior lamp switch position)  
4 Turn signals, right  
5 Turn signals, left  
Combination switch  
83  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Combination switch  
84  
7 Windshield wiper  
7
0
I
Wiper off  
Intermittent wiping  
II Normal wiper speed  
III Fast wiper speed  
Note:  
The windshield washer reservoir, hoses and nozzles are  
automatically heated.  
6
P54.25-2303-26  
For windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio  
see page 199.  
6 Control for windshield wiper/washer system:  
Push briefly for single wipe without adding washer  
fluid (use only when windshield is wet).  
Push past detent and hold to activate wiper and  
washer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield wipers smear  
Hazard warning flasher switch  
If the windshield wipers smear the windshield, even  
during rain, activate the washer system as often as  
necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be  
mixed in the correct ratio.  
Blocked windshield wipers  
If the windshield wipers become blocked (for example,  
due to snow), switch off the wipers.  
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove  
key from steering lock. Remove blockage.  
Activate combination switch again (key in steering lock  
position 1).  
The hazard warning flasher can be activated manually  
via the switch located in the dashboard.  
To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once.  
To deactivate, press switch again.  
Note:  
With the hazard warning flasher activated, the  
combination switch in position for either left or right  
turn, and the key in steering lock position 2, only the  
respective left or right side turn signals will operate.  
Hazard warning flasher  
85  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
86  
Climate control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Temperature selector, left side passenger  
The system is always at operational readiness, except  
when manually switched off.  
compartment  
The climate control only operates with the engine  
running.  
2 Temperature selector, right side passenger  
compartment  
The temperature selector should be left at the desired  
temperature setting. The temperature selected is  
reached as quickly as possible.  
3 Air volume control switch  
4 Air distribution control switch  
5 Rear window defroster  
The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a  
higher or lower temperature.  
6 Economy mode  
The climate control removes considerable moisture from  
the air during operation in the cooling mode. It is  
normal for water to drip on the ground through ducts in  
the underbody.  
7 Air recirculation, Residual engine heat utilization  
8 Air volume control for center air outlets, turn wheel  
up to open.  
9 Air volume control for side air outlet and side  
window defroster outlet, turn wheel up to open.  
10 Center air outlets, adjustable  
11 Side air outlet, adjustable  
12 Windshield air outlet  
13 Side window defroster outlet, adjustable  
Climate control  
87  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
88  
Basic setting – heater  
Basic setting – air conditioner  
Select temperature for each side of the passenger  
compartment.  
Select temperature for each side of the passenger  
compartment.  
Select air volume with control Q switch, set at least  
to position 2 to prevent windows from fogging up.  
Select air volume with control Q switch, at least to  
position 1 to start the air conditioner.  
Set air distribution control switch to position shown  
above.  
Set air distribution control switch to position a.  
Open center air outlets i.  
Turn defroster outlets for side windows to the detent  
position.  
Open left and right side air outlets i.  
Open center air outlets as desired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special settings (use only for short duration)  
Defogging windows  
Defrosting  
Windows fogged up on inside.  
Set temperature selectors and switches for air volume  
Switch off economy mode S. Indicator lamp goes out.  
and air distribution to position P.  
Switch off air recirculation O. Indicator lamp goes  
Close center air outlets.  
out.  
Close left and right side air outlets.  
Set air distribution control switch to position c.  
Increase air volume with control switch.  
Turn defroster outlets for side windows to the detent  
position.  
Close center and right side air outlets i.  
Turn defroster outlets for side windows to the detent  
position.  
Climate control  
89  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
90  
Windshield fogged up on outside.  
Rear window defroster  
Switch on windshield wipers.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
To select, press F button.  
Set air distribution control switch to position d  
or a.  
To cancel, press F button again.  
Note:  
Economy  
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed  
before activating the defroster.  
The function of this setting corresponds to the air  
conditioning mode. However, because the air  
conditioning compressor will not engage (fuel savings),  
it is not possible to air condition in this setting.  
The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power.  
To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the  
defroster as soon as the window is clear.  
Press S button to activate.  
The defroster is automatically turned off after a  
maximum of 12 minutes of operation.  
Press S button once again to return to previous  
setting.  
If several power consumers are turned on  
simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged,  
it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn  
itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside  
the switch starts blinking.  
Climate control - OFF  
To switch the climate control off, set air volume control  
switch to position 0.  
The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off.  
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the  
defroster automatically turns itself back on.  
While driving, use this setting only temporarily,  
otherwise the windshield could fog up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Air recirculation  
Residual engine heat utilization (REST)  
This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the  
entry of annoying odors or dust into the vehicle’s  
interior.  
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue  
heating the interior for a short while.  
Air volume is controlled automatically. Select  
temperature for each side of the passenger  
compartment. Set air distribution control switch to the  
desired position.  
Outside air is not supplied to the vehicle’s interior.  
To select, press O button.  
To cancel, press O button again.  
To select:  
The system will automatically switch from recirculated  
air to fresh air  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 0 or remove.  
after approximately 5 minutes at outside  
Press O button. Indicator lamp in the button lights  
up.  
temperatures below approximately 40°F (5°C),  
after approximately 30 minutes, at outside  
This function selection will not activate if the battery  
charge level is insufficient.  
temperatures above approximately 40°F (5°C),  
after approximately 5 minutes, if button S is  
To cancel:  
pressed.  
Press O button. Indicator lamp in the button goes  
out.  
At high outside temperatures, the system automatically  
engages the recirculated air mode for approximately  
30 minutes, thereby increasing the cooling capacity  
performance. Press O button again to extend the  
recirculated air mode.  
The system will automatically shut off  
if you turn key in steering lock to position 2,  
after approximately 30 minutes,  
if the battery voltage drops.  
Climate control  
91  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Important!  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
92  
Dust Filter  
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out  
before outside air enters the passenger compartment  
through the air distribution system.  
This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner system  
that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a  
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a  
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected  
in a recovery system for recycling.  
Note:  
Keep the air intake grille in front of windshield free of  
snow and debris.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio and telephone, operation  
Operating safety  
Warning!  
These instructions are intended to help you become  
acquainted with your Mercedes- Benz car radio. They  
contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user  
functions.  
Any alternations made to electronic components  
can cause malfunctions  
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer 1 and  
telephone 1 are interconnected. Therefore, when  
one of the components is defective or has not been  
removed/replaced properly this may impair the  
function of other components.  
Warning!  
In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an  
accident, system settings should be entered with  
the vehicle at standstill and systems should be  
operated by the driver only when traffic conditions  
permit. Always pay full attention to traffic  
conditions first before operating system controls  
while driving.  
These malfunctions might seriously impair the  
operating safety of your vehicle.  
We recommend that you have any service work or  
alternations on electronic components done in an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a  
distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
1
Optional equipment  
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction  
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation.  
The right to correct errors and make technical amendments is  
reserved.  
Audio system  
93  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
94  
Operating and display elements  
1 On/off, volume, see page 97  
6 CD mode selector, see page 105  
7 Display panel, see page 101  
8 Alpha-numeric keypad for  
2 Telephone mode selector, see page 108  
3 Seek, see page 99, 102 and 106  
4 Radio mode selector, see page 99  
station storage and frequency entry, see page 100  
CD/Track access, see page 105 and 107  
optional telephone, see page 108  
5 Tune, see page 99 and 100  
Fast forward/reverse, see page 103 and 106  
9 Function button, see page 100 and 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Soft keys for  
radio band selection, see page 99  
tone controls, see page 97  
scan, see page 100  
Tape eject, see page 102  
Tape track select, see page 102  
Dolby, see page 103  
CD random/repeat, see page 107  
11 Tape mode selector, see page 101  
Anti-theft system  
If the power supply to the  
radio has been  
interrupted,“CODE” will  
appear on the display when it  
The code number is shown on the Radio code card,  
supplied with the radio.  
is next switched on. The radio  
will only work after the five-digit code has been entered  
using the buttons on the right-hand control panel.  
Important!  
Never leave the Radio code card in the vehicle. Keep it in  
a safe place.  
Audio system  
95  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
96  
Entering the code number  
Button and soft key operation  
Switch on the radio.“CODE” will appear on the display.  
Using the buttons on the alpha-numeric keypad, enter  
the five digit code. Confirm by pressing the “OK” key.  
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right  
side of radio face) and the function buttons (left side of  
the radio face) are referred to as “buttons” and the four  
keys under the display are referred to as “soft keys”.  
If an incorrect code has been entered and confirmed,  
“CODE” will reappear on the display. The correct code  
must be entered once again.  
Note:  
Do not press directly on the radio display face.  
If an incorrect code is entered  
three times, “WAIT” will  
appear on the display and the  
radio will be locked out for  
about 10 minutes.  
Note:  
The lock out time will only count down if the radio is left  
switched on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
Audio functions  
The AUD key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE and  
BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and treble are  
stored separately for the cassette and CD modes. Tone  
level settings are identified by the vertical bars. The  
center (flat) setting is shown by one longer bar in the  
center of the display.  
Switching on and off  
Press the control knob  
.
The radio is switched off when the ignition key is turned  
to position 0 or removed from the ignition. The radio is  
switched on again when the ignition key is turned to  
position 1 or 2.  
Bass  
Note:  
Press the AUD key repeatedly  
until “BASS” appears in the  
display.  
The radio can also be switched on even if the ignition  
key is not inserted, but will switch itself off  
automatically after one hour to conserve vehicle battery  
power.  
Treble  
Adjusting the volume  
Press the AUD key repeatedly  
until “TREBLE” appears in the  
display.  
Turn the control knob - turning the knob clockwise will  
increase the volume, counterclockwise will decrease the  
volume.  
Press the “+” key to increase  
or the “-” key to decrease the level.  
Audio system  
97  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
98  
Balance  
Centering all audio functions  
Press the AUD key repeatedly  
until “BALANCE” appears in  
the display.  
Push and hold down the  
“AUD” key. All audio  
functions (bass, treble and  
balance) are set to center or  
flat positions, and the volume  
Press the “L” key to move the  
sound to the left speaker or the “R” key to move the  
sound to the right speaker.  
is adjusted to a pre-set level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio mode  
Manual tuning  
Press either the  
or  
Selecting radio mode  
button. Step-by-step tuning in  
ascending or descending  
order of frequency will take  
place.  
Press  
button.  
Selecting the band  
The first three tuning steps will take place without  
muting. The radio will then be muted and high-speed  
tuning will take place until the button is released.  
The following tuning intervals will be shown on the  
display:  
Press the key located below  
the desired band. The band  
selected is shown in the top  
line of the display.  
FM  
AM  
WB  
200 kHz  
10 kHz  
Channels 1-7  
Frequency ranges:  
FM  
87.9 - 107.9 MHz  
530 - 1710 kHz  
approx. 162 MHz  
AM  
WB  
Seek tuning  
Press either the  
or  
button. The radio will tune  
to the next receivable station.  
Audio system  
99  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
100  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Scan tuning  
Storing stations  
Press the SC key. Each strong  
receivable station on the band  
selected will be tuned in for  
8 seconds. The first scan will  
tune only the stations with a  
Hold the number button down for approximately  
2 seconds. The currently displayed frequency is stored  
on the selected station button. The storage procedure is  
confirmed by a short signal tone.  
high signal strength. The second scan will tune every  
receivable station. By pressing either the  
or buttons, or the “SC” key the scan mode  
Retrieving a station from memory  
,
,
Press the desired station button.  
can be cancelled.  
Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)  
Station memory  
Select the band. Press the  
button and enter the  
desired frequency using the  
alpha-numeric keypad.  
Frequencies outside of the  
Ten stations can be stored in  
the AM and FM bands via the  
alpha-numeric keypad. The  
“0” button corresponds to  
location 10. Weatherband  
frequency ranges (frequencies specified on page 99)  
will not be accepted. The frequency input mode is  
cancelled if no button is pressed within 4 seconds.  
(WB) channels 1 to 7 can be retrieved via the alpha-  
numeric keypad and are preset at the factory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cassette mode  
The radio will switch to  
cassette mode. Track 1 will be  
played and “SIDE 1”  
displayed. Track 1 is the side  
Playing cassettes  
Press the “TAPE” button. When the eject (EJ) key is  
pressed, the display folds down and the cassette slot  
becomes visible. Push the cassette into the slot until it  
engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically.  
of the cassette which is facing  
upwards. The cassette deck will automatically detect the  
type of tape and switch the equalization automatically.  
A cassette symbol in the display indicates that a tape is  
in the mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes but  
not in cassette mode.  
Notes:  
Do not press directly on the radio display face.  
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is  
switched off or another mode is selected.  
Return the display panel to its normal position by  
folding it back up and pressing gently on the display  
frame to lock in place.  
If a cassette is in the  
mechanism, cassette mode  
can be selected by using the  
“TAPE” button. If no cassette  
has been inserted, the display  
will show “NO TAPE”.  
When playing mono recorded tapes (e.g. books) through  
a stereo system the sound from one track might bleed to  
the other track, despite setting the balance to the full  
left or full right speakers.  
Important:  
If the display is in the down position for more than  
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will  
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is  
returned to its normal position.  
Audio system  
101  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
102  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Cassette eject  
Track search forwards/backwards  
Press the eject (EJ) key. The display will fold down and  
the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then  
fold the display back up manually. The radio will switch  
back to radio mode automatically.  
Press the  
button.  
“SEEK FWD” will be shown on  
the display and the track  
search will run the tape  
forwards to the start of the  
next track.  
Note:  
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is  
switched off.  
Press the  
“SEEK RWD” will be shown  
on the display and the track  
button.  
Important!  
search will run the tape  
backwards to the start of the  
track currently playing. Track search can be interrupted  
by pressing the same button again.  
If the display is in the down position for more than  
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will  
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is  
returned to its normal position.  
Note:  
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a  
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.  
Track selection  
Press the track selection  
(TRK) key. The current track  
will be displayed as “SIDE 1”  
or “SIDE 2”. The track will be  
changed automatically at the  
end of the tape.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fast forward/reverse  
Note:  
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a  
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.  
Press the  
button.  
“FORWARD” will appear on  
the display and fast forward  
will start.  
Scan will be interrupted if the  
,
,
,
buttons or the “SC” key is pressed.  
Press the  
button.  
“REWIND” will appear on the  
display and fast reverse will  
start.  
Dolby NR 1 (noise reduction system)  
To enable optimum  
reproduction of cassettes  
recorded using the Dolby B  
system, press the “AUD” key  
Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same  
button again, or it will stop automatically at the  
beginning or the end of the tape. The track will  
automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape  
and play will begin.  
followed by the NR key so the  
“NR” in the display is not highlighted. To turn off  
Dolby B noise reduction, press the “NR” key so the “NR”  
in the display is highlighted.  
Scanning  
1
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction  
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation.  
Press the “SC” key. Each track  
on the cassette will be played  
for 8 seconds in ascending  
order.  
Audio system  
103  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
104  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
CD mode  
Only use CDs, which bear the  
label shown and that conform to  
the compact disc digital audio  
standard (IEC 60908).  
General notes on CD mode  
Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode,  
“TEMP HIGH” will appear in the display and muting  
will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio  
mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe  
operating level.  
Use of CDs which do not meet this  
standard may cause damage to the  
CD changer. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an  
adapter.  
Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are  
too low, “TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD will  
play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are driving  
over rough roads.  
Warning!  
The CD changer 1 is a Class 1 laser product. There  
is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover  
is opened or damaged.  
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during  
playback.  
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer 1 does not  
contain any parts which can be serviced by the  
user. For safety reasons, have any service work  
which may be necessary performed only by  
qualified personnel.  
Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the  
CDs or apply any label to the CDs.  
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially  
available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays,  
etc. should be used.  
1
Optional equipment  
Replace the CD in its container after use. Protect CDs  
from heat and direct sunlight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD changer installed  
Loading/emptying the CD magazine  
Slide the changer door to the right and press the eject  
button  
. The magazine will be ejected. Remove the  
magazine. Pull out the CD tray until its stop is reached  
and place the CDs in the recess of the tray, label side up.  
Push the tray into the magazine in the direction shown  
by the arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the  
changer.  
4
2
3
1
Important!  
Close the door after the magazine has been inserted.  
2
Playing CDs  
Press the CD button. The CD most recently played will  
start at the point where it was last switched off. CDs  
stored in the magazine can be selected by using the  
station preset buttons 1-6.  
1 CD changer 1  
2 CD magazine  
3 CD tray  
The magazine slot number of  
the selected CD will then be  
displayed after “CD”. The  
number of the track being  
played will be displayed after  
“TRACK”.  
4 CD  
If a CD changer 1 is installed, it can be operated from the  
front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must  
be installed for CD playing.  
1
Optional equipment  
Audio system  
105  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
106  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
If there is no CD in the  
selected magazine slot,  
“NO CD” and the  
corresponding slot number  
will be displayed  
Fast forward/reverse  
Press the  
forward.  
button and hold it down for audible fast  
Press the  
reverse.  
button and hold it down for audible  
(e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been  
played, the next CD will automatically be selected and  
played.  
The search will stop when the  
button is released. The  
relative time of the track will  
be displayed during the  
search. The search mode will  
Skipping tracks forwards/backwards  
Press the  
played.  
button. The next track on the CD will be  
cancel if the beginning or end of the CD is reached.  
Press the  
button. If the track has been playing for  
Scanning  
more than 10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that  
track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it  
will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks,  
the respective button must be pressed until the desired  
track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is  
reached during the search, the first or last track will be  
played.  
Press the SC key. Each track will be played for 8 seconds  
in ascending order. The search will stop at the track in  
question if the  
,
,
,
buttons or the  
“SC” key is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Random play/repeat function  
Direct track selection  
The tracks of the current CD are played in random order  
when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the  
RDM key to switch on, and press RDM again to switch  
off.  
Tracks can be selected directly using the buttons on the  
alpha-numeric keypad. Press the function button,  
followed by the track number.  
When the repeat function  
(RPT) has been selected, a  
particular track can be played  
for as many times as desired.  
Press the RPT key to switch  
on, and press RPT again to switch off.  
Note:  
Both functions cannot be used simultaneously.  
Audio system  
107  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
108  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Telephone operation  
Entering telephone number and starting dialing  
process  
Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated  
cellular telephone 1 can be performed and displayed via  
the car radio. Further instructions for operating the car  
telephone can be found in the operation guide for the  
cellular telephone 1.  
Enter the desired telephone  
number using the alpha-  
numeric keypad. The number  
can have up to 32 digits, but  
only 13 of these can be  
displayed. The dialing process is started by pressing the  
SND button. The entered number can be corrected using  
the “CLR” key.  
Switching the telephone on and off  
Switching on: Press the  
button, “TEL” appears in the  
corner of the display.  
Press the CLR key briefly -  
and the last digit will be  
deleted.  
Switching off: Press and hold  
button until the telephone symbol “TEL” no  
the  
Press the CLR key longer - and  
the complete number will be deleted.  
longer appears in the display, or press the “PWR” button  
on the phone’s keypad.  
1
Optional equipment  
Calling up the phone book  
The numbers stored in the telephone memory can be  
called up via either name or number entries. The  
memory contents from the portable phone must be  
downloaded and the telephone menu must be selected  
in order to call up the phone book. Refer to the  
“Memory download” section of the cellular telephone  
operation guide for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching between name search and number search  
Press ABC key - Name search  
Placing a call  
When a number or a name  
has been selected using the  
method described above,  
press the SND key.  
Press NUM key - Number search  
Searching and selecting phone book entries by name  
Press the ABC key. The current name is shown on the  
display. The stored entries in alphabetical order can be  
Manual repeat dialing (redial)  
The last number entered can be re-selected by pressing  
the SND key once and the call can be placed by pressing  
the SND key a second time. The last dialed telephone  
number is shown on the display. Using the  
or button, the numbers stored in the re-dial  
memory of the telephone can be selected.  
selected using the  
or  
button. By pressing the  
or buttons, the stored entries can be selected  
according to alphabetical initial letters (e.g. A-Adam,  
B-Brown, M-Miller).  
,
,
Searching and selecting phone book entries by  
number  
The abbreviation L and the  
number in the memory are  
shown in the top line of the  
display.  
Press the NUM key. The current number is shown on  
the display. The stored entries can be selected in  
numerical order using the  
pressing the or  
can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry no. 2,  
Entry no. 7, etc.).  
or  
button. By  
buttons, the stored entries  
Accepting incoming call in telephone mode  
With an incoming call, the ringing tone will be heard  
and the message “CALL” appears in the display. Press  
the SND key to answer the call.  
Audio system  
109  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
110  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode  
Component malfunctions  
If the telephone is activated in the background  
(telephone symbol in the display), then a switch is made  
automatically to telephone when an incoming call is  
received. The audio source is muted, the ringing tone is  
heard and the message “CALL” appears. After the call  
has been terminated, the previously selected audio  
source is resumed.  
The radio, CD changer 1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated  
cellular telephone 1 are part of a fiberoptic networked  
system. Failure of one of the components can lead to  
malfunctions of the other components. Please contact  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes for more information in the event  
of a malfunction.  
1
Optional equipment  
Terminating call  
A current call can be terminated by pressing the END  
key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power windows  
Express opening of door windows  
Press switch k past resistance point and release –  
window lowers to fully open position. To interrupt  
procedure, briefly press j or k.  
Warning!  
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no  
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  
procedure.  
The closing procedures can be immediately  
reversed by either pressing the switch k,  
turning the key to the unlocking position, or  
pressing button Œ on the remote control, and  
holding it.  
P54.25-2031-26  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
Power window switches located on center console  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
Press switch in to resistance point:  
k to open  
j to close  
Note:  
Release switch when window is in desired position.  
The power windows can also be operated with the  
hardtop switch. To do so, push hardtop switch twice and  
hold, see page 123.  
Interior equipment  
111  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
112  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Interior lighting  
2 Door contact off.  
Interior lamps remain switched off, even when  
opening a door.  
3 Interior lamp on.  
Notes:  
If a door remains open and the switch in position 1, the  
interior lamp switches off after approximately  
5 minutes.  
The trunk lamp is switched on and off with the interior  
lamp.  
Night security illumination  
1 Automatic interior lighting.  
When exiting the vehicle after driving with the exterior  
lamps on, they switch on again for added security for  
approximately 30 seconds after closing the last door.  
The lamp-on time period can be changed at your  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Interior lamp is switched on, and off (soft fade)  
delayed, when unlocking or locking the vehicle, or  
when opening or closing a door. However, there will  
be no (soft fade) delay when the key is in steering  
lock position 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sun visors with vanity mirror  
Interior  
Warning  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing  
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  
possible.  
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.  
P68.60-2024-26  
Swing sun visors down to protect against sun glare.  
Warning!  
Do not use the driver’s vanity mirror while driving.  
Interior equipment  
113  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
114  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Cup holder and glove box  
Cup holder  
To open cup holder:  
Briefly press button (1). The cup holder opens  
automatically.  
To store cup holder:  
Push cup holder against dashboard until it engages.  
Caution!  
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only  
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.  
Do not fill containers to a height where the contents  
could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot  
liquids.  
Glove box  
2 Locking: Turn key to vertical position and remove.  
3 Unlocking: Turn key to left and remove.  
4 Opening: Pull on handle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage compartments  
Storage compartment in center console  
Slide cover (1) to open.  
Storage compartment in armrest  
To open compartment under armrest:  
Lift lid with handle (2).  
To close:  
Lower lid until it engages in lock.  
Notes:  
1
2
The storage compartment in the armrest is locked with  
the central locking system.  
The storage compartment in the armrest cannot be  
locked with the dashboard-mounted central locking  
switch.  
Additionally, pockets can be found behind the seats and  
in the door panels.  
P68.00-2327-27  
Warning!  
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to  
prevent stored objects from being thrown about  
and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.  
Interior equipment  
115  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
116  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Ashtrays  
By touching the bottom of the cover (1) lightly, the  
ashtray opens automatically.  
To remove ashtray insert, pull ashtray past detent. Hold  
left and right side (2) of insert and pull up.  
To install ashtray insert, place it into ashtray frame and  
push down to engage.  
Warning!  
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing  
still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”  
(manual transmission: in Neutral), turn off the  
engine and set the parking brake. Otherwise the  
vehicle might move as a result of unintended  
contact with the gear selector lever.  
Coin holder  
Open ashtray and fold down (3) cover plate (1).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lighter  
Slide cover (arrow) open. Turn key in steering lock to  
position 1 or 2.  
Push in lighter (1); it will pop out automatically when  
hot.  
Warning!  
Never touch the heating element or sides of the  
lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.  
1
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock. Do not leave children  
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an  
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle  
equipment may cause serious personal injury.  
Note:  
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate  
electrical accessories up to maximum 85 W.  
P68.20-2170-27  
Interior equipment  
Instruments  
117  
Instrument  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
and controls  
cluster display  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
118  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Parcel net in passenger footwell  
Cellular telephone  
A small convenience parcel net is located in the  
passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such  
as road maps, mail, etc..  
The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a cellular  
telephone. For further information and installation  
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Warning!  
Warning!  
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects  
having sharp edges, in the parcel net.  
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a  
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether  
or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the  
driver should not use the cellular telephone while  
the vehicle is in motion. Stop the vehicle in a safe  
location before answering or placing a call.  
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden  
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside  
the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.  
Shelf behind roll bars  
Warning!  
The shelf behind the roll bars should not be used to  
carry objects. This will prevent such objects from  
being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants  
during an accident or sudden maneuver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Garage door opener  
The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to  
three separately controlled objects.  
Notes:  
SOS  
Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible  
with the integrated opener. If you should experience  
difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call  
Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA  
only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in  
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
1
For operation in the USA only: This device complies  
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
2
P68.05-2025-26  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
1 Integrated remote control transmitter  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
2 Hand-held remote control transmitter  
Warning!  
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void  
to the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
When programming a garage door opener, the door  
moves up or down.  
When programming or operating the remote  
control make sure there is no possibility of anyone  
being harmed by the moving door.  
Garage door opener  
119  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
120  
Car care  
Index  
Garage door opener  
Programming or reprogramming the integrated  
remote control:  
Note:  
If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully  
program the integrated remote control device to learn  
the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door  
opener could be equipped with the “rolling code  
feature”.  
1. Turn key in starter switch to position 1 or 2.  
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the  
device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches  
(5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the  
integrated remote control located on the inside rear  
view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.  
Rolling code programming:  
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code  
devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these  
instructions after completing the “Programming”  
portion of this text. (A second person may make the  
following training procedures quicker and easier.)  
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-  
held transmitter button and the desired integrated  
remote control button. Do not release the buttons  
until completing step 4.  
4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control  
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the  
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be  
released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates  
successful programming of the new frequency  
signal). To program the remaining two buttons,  
follow steps 1 through 4.  
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener  
motor head unit. Exact location and color of the  
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If  
there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,  
reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.  
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener  
motor head unit (which activates the “training  
light”).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Operation of remote control:  
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate  
step 3.  
1. Turn key in starter switch to position 1 or 2.  
2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate  
the remote controlled device. The integrated remote  
control transmitter continues to send the signal as  
long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.  
3. Firmly press and release the programmed  
integrated remote control transmit button. Press  
and release same button a second time to complete  
the training process. (Some garage door openers  
may require you to do this procedure a third time to  
complete the training.)  
Erasing the remote control memory:  
1. Turn key in starter switch to position 1 or 2.  
4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the  
programmed button on the integrated remote  
control transmitter.  
2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side  
buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the  
control lamp blinks rapidly, will erase the codes of  
all three channels.  
Canadian programming:  
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may  
automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and  
hold the integrated remote control transmitter button  
(note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion)  
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held  
transmitter every two seconds until the frequency  
signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash  
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon  
successful training.  
Garage door opener  
121  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
122  
Car care  
Index  
Retractable hardtop  
Retractable hardtop  
To prevent damage to hardtop or luggage/cargo when  
lowering the roof:  
Important!  
load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover,  
A minimum clearance height of 51/2 ft. (1.65 m) and an  
additional 10 in (25 cm) length behind the vehicle is  
required to lower or raise the hardtop.  
do not permit luggage/cargo to raise the closed  
luggage cover,  
do not load anything on top of the luggage cover,  
The additional space is required since the roof moves up  
and the trunk lid back during raising and lowering  
operations.  
do not place anything on shelf behind roll bars.  
Note:  
The raising or lowering operations can only be started  
with the luggage cover and trunk lid closed.  
To prevent the hardtop from being lowered  
unintentionally while a roof luggage carrier is installed,  
keep luggage cover in trunk in the open position.  
The raising or lowering procedure is immediately  
interrupted by releasing the hardtop switch.  
Do not operate the roof while a roof luggage carrier is  
installed.  
Warning!  
Before operating the switch for the retractable  
hardtop make sure that no persons due to  
inattention are injured by the moving parts  
(retractable roof, roof frame, and trunk lid).  
Hands must never be placed near the roof frame,  
upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf behind roll  
bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is  
being raised or lowered. Serious personal injury  
may occur.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lowering Hardtop  
1
P65.10-2102-26  
P77.39-2030-26  
1. Engage parking brake.  
Important!  
2. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
Do not manually move corner flaps of rear shelf. Doing  
so will result in damage to the roof folding mechanism  
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited  
Warranty.  
Prior to cleaning the rear window, see page 249.  
Retractable hardtop  
123  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
124  
Car care  
Index  
Retractable hardtop  
3. Slide hardtop switch back (1) and hold:  
If the hardtop switch is held or is released and slid back  
again within approximately 30 seconds, the door  
windows will close.  
The indicator lamp in the hardtop switch lights  
up.  
However, the door windows can also be closed/opened  
later on. Slide hardtop switch twice forward/backward  
and hold.  
Note:  
If indicator lamp blinks slowly, a malfunction  
has occurred in the system.  
The rear quarter windows cannot be raised with the  
hardtop lowered.  
If indicator lamp blinks rapidly, the trunk lid  
and/or the luggage cover may be open, and need  
to be closed.  
Notes:  
For safety reasons, the hardtop cannot be lowered while  
driving.  
The door windows lower.  
The trunk lid opens rearward.  
Lowering a wet hardtop can result in water reaching the  
vehicle interior. The hardtop should be dry when  
lowering it into the storage compartment.  
The hardtop lowers into its storage  
compartment, simultaneously the shelf behind  
roll bars opens, and rear quarter windows lower.  
Warning!  
The shelf behind the roll bars closes.  
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle  
only with the hardtop either completely closed and  
locked, or fully lowered into its storage  
compartment.  
The trunk lid closes.  
The indicator lamp in the hardtop switch goes  
out – the opening procedure is completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Raising Hardtop  
3. Slide hardtop switch forward (2) and hold:  
The indicator lamp in the hardtop switch lights  
up.  
Note:  
If indicator lamp blinks slowly, a malfunction  
has occurred in the system.  
If indicator lamp blinks rapidly, the trunk lid  
and/or the luggage cover may be open, and need  
to be closed.  
The door windows lower.  
2
P77.39-2031-26  
The trunk lid opens rearward.  
The hardtop is raised from its storage  
1. Engage parking brake.  
compartment, simultaneously the shelf behind  
roll bars opens and rear quarter windows close.  
2. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
The shelf behind the roll bars closes.  
The trunk lid closes, and the hardtop locks.  
The indicator lamp in the hardtop switch goes  
out - the closing procedure is completed.  
Retractable hardtop  
125  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
126  
Car care  
Index  
Retractable hardtop  
If the hardtop switch is held or is released and slid  
forward again within approximately 30 seconds, the  
door windows will close.  
For safety reasons, the hardtop cannot be raised while  
driving. However, if the hardtop is not completely locked  
after raising it, you can then lock it while driving by  
pushing the hardtop switch forward.  
However, the door windows can also be closed/opened  
later on. Slide hardtop switch twice forward/backward  
and hold.  
If the indicator lamp in the hardtop switch blinks slowly  
while activating the switch,  
the battery voltage may be insufficient – start  
Warning!  
engine and let run while activating switch,  
The hardtop is not fully closed and locked:  
the system may be overloaded (for example after  
lowering or raising the hardtop approximately  
5 consecutive times) - after approximately  
10 minutes the hardtop switch may be activated  
again.  
• if the indicator lamp in the hardtop switch  
does not go out (key in steering lock  
position 2),  
• if the indicator lamp blinks, and a warning  
sounds for 10 seconds when starting to drive.  
If the indicator lamp continues to blink, lock the hardtop  
manually, see page 238.  
Stop the vehicle and before continuing to drive,  
close and lock the hardtop:  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
The key should be in steering lock position 2.  
Slide the hardtop switch forward.  
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle  
only with the hardtop either completely closed and  
locked, or fully lowered into its storage  
compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wind screen  
Installation  
1. Remove screen from its storage bag (1), located on  
wall behind the seat backrests, and unfold.  
2. Attach straps to pins (2).  
3. Close snap buttons (3).  
4
3
4. Pull wind screen on molding over roll bars.  
Warning!  
The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vision to  
the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a possible  
accident at time of limited sight distance (e.g.  
darkness), the wind screen should be removed.  
1
2
P65.00-2046-26  
1 Storage bag  
2 Pin  
Note:  
Pull on snap button head to open the snap button.  
3 Snap button  
4 Coat hook  
Wind screen  
127  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
128  
Car care  
Index  
Luggage cover  
Luggage cover  
To close compartment:  
Pull out on handle and hook guide rod into left and right  
side holders.  
To open compartment:  
2
Unhook guide rod from holders and guide luggage cover  
into storage compartment.  
Important!  
To prevent damage to hardtop or luggage/cargo when  
lowering the roof:  
3
4
load trunk only to the height of the luggage  
1
cover (3),  
5
do not permit luggage/cargo to raise the closed  
6
luggage cover (4),  
do not load anything on top of the luggage cover (5),  
do not place anything on shelf behind roll bars (6).  
2
P77.30-2064-27  
1 Handle  
2 Holder  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving instructions .......................157 Cruise control ................................. 166  
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ........157 Brake assist system  
Driving  
Control and operation of  
radio transmitters .....................130  
The first 1 000 miles  
(BAS) ...........................................169  
Drinking and driving .................157  
Pedals ...........................................157  
Power assistance .........................158  
Brakes ...........................................158  
Driving off ....................................159  
Parking .........................................159  
Tires ..............................................160  
Snow chains ................................163  
Winter driving instructions ......163  
Block heater .................................165  
Deep water ...................................165  
Passenger compartment ............165  
Traveling abroad .........................165  
Antilock brake system  
(ABS) ........................................... 171  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP) ...........................................173  
What you should know  
(1 500 km) ................................. 131  
Maintenance ................................... 131  
Tele Aid ...........................................132  
Catalytic converter ........................140  
Emission control ............................ 141  
Steering lock ...................................142  
Starting and turning off  
the engine ..................................144  
Manual transmission ....................145  
Automatic transmission ...............147  
Parking brake .................................156  
at the gas station .......................177  
Check regularly and  
before a long trip ......................179  
Contents - Driving  
129  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
130  
Car care  
Index  
Control and operation of radio transmitters  
Control and operation of radio transmitters  
Radio and telephone  
Telephones and two-way radio  
Warning!  
Warning!  
Please do not forget that your primary  
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being  
connected to an external antenna) from inside the  
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could  
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic  
system, possibly resulting in an accident and  
personal injury.  
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate  
the radio or telephone1 if road and traffic  
conditions permit.  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering  
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a  
citizens band unit should only be used inside the  
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is  
installed on the outside of the vehicle.  
1
Observe all legal requirements.  
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions  
regarding use of an external antenna.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)  
Maintenance  
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the  
break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its  
performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle  
during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate  
vehicle and engine speeds.  
We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle  
serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in  
accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called  
for by the FSS.  
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance  
with the Service Booklet at the designated times/  
mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by  
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle  
driving) and excessive engine speeds.  
Manual transmission:  
Downshift at proper engine speeds.  
For information on the Flexible service system (FSS),  
see page 77.  
Automatic transmission:  
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended  
to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear.  
We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1”  
only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).  
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually  
increased to the permissible maximum.  
The first 1 000 miles  
131  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
132  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
Tele Aid  
Important!  
Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call,  
you will receive a user ID and password via first call  
mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting  
“Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account  
information, remote door unlock and more.  
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be  
performed by completing the subscriber agreement and  
placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button.  
Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a  
system that is not activated. If the system is not  
activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays  
on after turning electronic key in starter switch to  
position 2.  
System self-check  
Initially, after turning the key in steering lock to  
position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the  
indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the Roadside  
Assistance button and the Information  
button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not  
come on).  
If you have any questions regarding activation, please  
call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)  
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).  
Important!  
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)  
Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the  
“SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and  
in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated  
constantly in red after the system self check.  
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response;  
automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance  
and information.  
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the  
vehicle’s battery is charged and properly connected, not  
damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. To  
activate, press the “SOS” button, the Roadside  
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the  
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as  
soon as possible.  
Assistance button or the Information button ¡,  
depending on the type of response required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency calls  
The Tele Aid system is available if:  
it has been activated and is operational. Activation  
requires a subscription for monitoring services and  
cellular air time  
An emergency call is initiated automatically:  
following an accident in which the Emergency  
Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy,  
the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals  
are available and pass the information on to the  
Response Center.  
if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on  
for more than 20 seconds, see pages 35 and 37.  
An emergency call can also be initiated manually by  
opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror  
labeled “SOS”, then briefly pressing the button located  
under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating  
an emergency call manually.  
Note:  
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the  
vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite  
network and pass the information on to the Response  
Center.  
Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator  
lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. All  
information relevant to the emergency, such as the  
location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite  
location system), vehicle model, identification number  
and color are generated.  
Warning!  
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is  
illuminated continuously and there was no voice  
connection to the Response Center established,  
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an  
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone  
network is not available).  
A voice connection between the Response Center and  
the occupants of the vehicle will be established  
automatically soon after the emergency call has been  
initiated. When a voice connection is established the  
audio system mutes. The Response Center will attempt  
to determine more precisely the nature of the accident  
provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.  
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned  
by other means.  
Tele Aid  
133  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
134  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
Initiating an emergency call manually  
1
2
SOS  
P54.30-3045-26  
P54.30-3044-26  
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.  
Press the SOS button (2) briefly. The indicator lamp in  
the SOS button (2) will flash until the emergency call is  
concluded. Wait for a voice connection to the Response  
Center.  
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is  
concluded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will  
either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or  
arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest  
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as labor and/  
or towing charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside  
Assistance manual for more information.  
Warning!  
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the  
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in  
a dangerous road location), please do not wait for  
voice contact after you have pressed the emergency  
button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a  
safe location. The Response Center will  
automatically contact local emergency officials  
with the vehicle’s approximate location if they  
receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make  
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.  
These programs are only available in the USA:  
Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start,  
a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire  
with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable,  
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits  
the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher  
to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle  
data.  
Roadside Assistance button •  
Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside  
Assistance button . Pressing and holding the  
button (for longer than 2 seconds), will initiate a call to  
a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The  
button will flash while the call is in progress. The  
Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the  
vehicle identification number, model, color and location  
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  
button remains illuminated in red for  
approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check  
after turning key in steering lock to position 2 (together  
with the “SOS” button and the Information  
button ¡).  
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance  
dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be  
established. The nature of the need for assistance can  
then be described.  
Tele Aid  
135  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
136  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
See system self-check on page 132 when the indicator  
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than  
approximately 10 seconds.  
For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit  
www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to  
you separately, to learn more (USA only).  
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  
button is illuminated continuously and there was  
no voice connection to the Response Center established,  
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside  
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network  
is not available).  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡  
remains illuminated in red for approximately  
10 seconds during the system self-check after turning  
key in steering lock to position 2 (together with the  
“SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button ).  
See system self-check on page 132 when the indicator  
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than  
approximately 10 seconds.  
Information button ¡  
Located below the center armrest cover is the  
Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the  
button (for longer than 2 seconds), will initiate a call to  
the Client Assistance Center. The button will flash while  
the call is in progress. The Tele Aid system will transmit  
data generating the vehicle identification number,  
model, color and location (subject to availability of  
cellular and GPS signals).  
If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is  
illuminated continuously and there was no voice  
connection to the Response Center established, then the  
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call  
(e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not  
available).  
A voice connection between the Client Assistance  
Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle  
will be established. Information regarding the operation  
of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or  
Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available  
to you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice  
contact will resume once the retransmission is  
completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be  
heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop  
flashing. The audio system operation will resume.  
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after  
pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in  
red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault  
or the service is not currently active, and may not  
initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and  
have the system checked or contact the Response Center  
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada) as soon as possible.  
Important!  
If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system  
does not reset, contact the Response Center at  
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or  
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.  
Upgrade Signals  
Tele Aid system processes calls using the following  
priority.  
Automatic emergency – First priority  
Manual emergency – Second priority  
Roadside assistance – Third priority  
Information – Fourth priority  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until  
the call is concluded and this can only be completed by  
a Response Center or Client Assistance Center  
representative.  
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio  
system is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or  
CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed)  
switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle  
must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place  
the call.  
Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are  
connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard,  
and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain  
information such as vehicle identification number or  
client information is not available, the operator may  
need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a  
Tele Aid  
137  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
138  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
Remote door unlock  
Stolen vehicle tracking services  
In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally  
(e.g. key inside vehicle), and the reserve key is not  
handy, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at  
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada). You will be asked to provide your password  
which you provided when you completed the subscriber  
agreement.  
In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident  
to the police who will issue numbered incident report.  
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response  
Center.  
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly  
contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle  
is located, the Response Center will contact the local  
Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will  
only be provided to Law Enforcement.  
Then return to your vehicle and pull outside trunk  
handle for a minimum of 20 seconds.  
The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with  
the remote door unlocking feature.  
Note:  
The remote door unlock feature is available if the  
relevant cellular phone network is available.  
The SOS button will flash to indicate receipt of the door  
unlock command. Once the vehicle is unlocked, a  
Response Center specialist will attempt to establish  
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.  
If the trunk handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds  
before door unlock authorization was received by the  
Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before  
pulling the trunk handle again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Warning!  
Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for  
The Tele Aid control unit is located under the  
driver’s seat. If there is accumulation of water or  
other liquid in this area, the Tele Aid control unit  
could suffer an electrical short circuit making the  
system inoperative. In this case the indicator lamp  
in the “SOS” button does not illuminate during or  
remains illuminated after the system self-check.  
Have the system checked at the nearest  
communication and the GPS (Global Positioning  
System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these  
signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not  
function and if this occurs, assistance must be  
summoned by other means.  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Tele Aid  
139  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
140  
Car care  
Index  
Catalytic converter  
Catalytic converter  
Warning!  
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type  
catalytic converters, an important element in  
conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve  
substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust  
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating  
condition by following our recommended maintenance  
instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.  
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate  
this vehicle in areas where combustible materials  
such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact  
with the hot exhaust system, as these materials  
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.  
Caution!  
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only  
premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.  
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should  
be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned  
fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to  
overheat, which could start a fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emission control  
Warning!  
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic  
components of the exhaust gases within permissible  
limits required by law.  
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your  
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,  
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and  
lead to death.  
These systems, of course, will function properly only  
when maintained strictly according to factory  
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,  
therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-  
Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine  
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,  
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly  
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.  
For details refer to the Service Booklet.  
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a  
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you  
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the  
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined  
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under  
these conditions, drive only with at least one  
window fully open.  
Emission control  
141  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
142  
Car care  
Index  
Steering lock  
Steering lock  
1 Steering is unlocked.  
(If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow  
the key to be turned clockwise to position 1.)  
0
Most electrical consumers can be operated. For  
detailed information see respective subjects.  
1
2 Driving position.  
3 Starting position.  
2
See page 144 for instructions on starting and turning off  
the engine.  
3
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment may cause serious personal  
injury.  
0 The key can be withdrawn in this position only. The  
steering is locked when the key is removed from the  
steering lock. If necessary, move steering wheel  
slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.  
In vehicles equipped with automatic transmission,  
the key can only be removed with the selector lever  
in position “P”. After removing the key or with the  
key in steering lock position 0, the selector lever is  
locked in position “P”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Caution!  
A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened  
while the key is in steering lock position 1 or 0.  
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible  
dead battery, always remove the key from the steering  
lock. Do not leave the key in steering lock position 0.  
With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the  
alternator (output) is limited.  
It is therefore recommended that you turn off  
unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stop-  
and-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of  
the battery.  
Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system  
may be minimized by turning off the following power  
consumers, for example: Heated seats, rear window  
defroster.  
Steering lock  
143  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
144  
Car care  
Index  
Starting and turning off the enging  
Starting and turning off the engine  
Vehicles with manual transmission:  
Do not depress accelerator. Fully depress clutch pedal,  
otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the  
integrated safety interlock.  
Before starting  
Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector  
lever is in position “P” or “N” (gearshift lever in  
neutral). Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
Turn key in steering lock clockwise to the stop. Release  
key only when the engine is firing regularly.  
Important!  
Starting  
Due to the installed starter nonrepeat feature, the key  
must be turned completely to the left before attempting  
to start the engine again.  
Vehicles with automatic transmission:  
Do not depress accelerator. Briefly turn key in steering  
lock clockwise to the stop and release. The starter will  
engage until the engine is running.  
In areas where temperatures frequently drop below  
-4°F (-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater  
be installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will  
advise you on this subject, see page 165.  
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops,  
turn key completely to the left and repeat starting the  
engine.  
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system  
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
Turning off  
Turn the key in the steering lock to position 0 to stop the  
engine.  
Vehicles with automatic transmission:  
The key can only be removed with your foot off the  
brake pedal and the selector lever in position “P”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual transmission  
See illustration for gearshift lever positions  
corresponding to the individual gears.  
3
5
4
Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into reverse;  
to shift into reverse, pull the gearshift lever up.  
1
5
2
1
3
1
6
4
R
Do not exceed the maximum engine speed in the  
individual gears. Refer to tachometer (see page 76) for  
engine speeds.  
6
R
2
P26.60-2053-26  
Manual transmission  
145  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
146  
Car care  
Index  
Manual transmission  
Important!  
Warning!  
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine  
can result in transmission damage that is not covered  
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move  
the gearshift lever, which could result in an  
accident or serious injury.  
Do not exceed engine speed limits, see page 76 .  
Warning!  
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission,  
getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever  
not engaged in 1st or reverse gear and parking  
brake engaged is dangerous.  
Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged 1st or  
reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle  
from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.  
Warning!  
On slippery road surfaces as well as high engine  
speeds, never downshift in order to obtain braking  
action. This could result in drive wheel slip and  
reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not  
prevent this type of loss of control.  
Always set the parking brake in addition to  
engaging 1st or reverse gear, see page 156 for  
parking brake.  
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel  
towards the road curb.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic transmission  
The automatic transmission selects individual gears  
automatically, dependent upon  
Selector lever position, see page 150  
Program mode selector switch, see page 154  
Accelerator position  
Vehicle speed  
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted,  
dependent on the driving style, the driving situation  
and the road characteristics.  
Important!  
P27.60-2102-26  
When parking the car or before working on the vehicle  
with the engine running, firmly engage the parking  
brake and shift the selector lever into “P”.  
Automatic transmission  
147  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
148  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Driving  
Important!  
The selector lever is automatically locked while in  
position “P”. To move the selector lever out of  
position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly  
depressed before the shift lock will release.  
After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”,  
wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before  
accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.  
Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the  
engine is idling normally and the service brake is  
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive.  
The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the  
selector lever is in drive or reverse position.  
Accelerator position  
Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration  
Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration  
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full  
throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum  
acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up  
on the accelerator – the transmission shifts up again.  
Warning!  
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”  
or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.  
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the  
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in  
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and  
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear  
when the engine is idling normally and when your  
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stopping  
Warning!  
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the  
transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service  
brake.  
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever  
not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous.  
Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone  
may not prevent your vehicle from moving,  
possibly hitting people or objects.  
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N”  
or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.  
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting  
to position “P”, see page 156 for parking brake.  
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not  
hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids  
unnecessary transmission heat build up.  
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel  
towards the road curb.  
Maneuvering  
Warning!  
To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a  
parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually  
releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never  
abruptly step on the accelerator.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move  
the gear selector lever from position “P”, which  
could result in an accident or serious injury.  
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),  
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying  
only slight partial throttle.  
Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the  
ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to  
come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the  
malfunction indication.  
Automatic transmission  
149  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
150  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Selector lever position  
Park position  
The park position is to be used when parking the  
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped.  
The park position is not intended to serve as a  
brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the  
driver should always use the parking brake in  
addition to placing the selector lever in park to  
secure the vehicle.  
Notes:  
The key can be removed from the steering lock  
only with the foot off the brake pedal and the  
selector lever in position “P”. With the key  
removed, the selector lever is locked in  
position “P”.  
P54.30-4496-26  
The current selector lever position is indicated in the  
gear range indicator display. The automatic gear  
shifting process can be adapted to specific operating  
conditions using the selector lever.  
With a malfunction in the vehicle’s electrical  
system the selector lever could remain locked in  
position “P”. To unlock the selector lever  
manually, see page 229.  
Reverse gear  
Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle  
stopped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dependent on the program mode selector switch  
position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the  
reverse gear is different. However, it is not  
possible to change the program mode while in  
reverse.  
Gear selection for special circumstances  
The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances  
can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the  
right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”.  
The gear range currently selected is indicated in the  
instrument cluster display.  
Neutral  
No power is transmitted from the engine to the  
drive axle. When the brakes are released, the  
vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do  
not engage “N” while driving except to coast  
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on  
icy roads, see page 163 for winter driving  
instructions).  
Briefly press selector lever in the “D –” direction:  
The transmission shift from the current gear range to  
the next lower gear range.  
Press and hold selector lever in the “D –” direction:  
The selector lever position display will switch to the  
gear range currently selected by the automatic  
transmission.  
Important!  
Shifting into another gear range that allows for quicker  
acceleration or to slow the vehicle down is possible.  
Downshifts can also be performed.  
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other  
reason with selector lever in “N” can result in  
transmission damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Note:  
To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever  
is moved in “D –” direction, the transmission will not  
shift to a lower gear range if the engine’s revolutions  
per minute limit would be exceeded.  
Drive  
The transmission automatically upshifts through  
5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving  
characteristics under all normal operating  
conditions.  
Automatic transmission  
151  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
152  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Briefly press selector lever in the “D +” direction:  
The transmission will shift from the current gear range  
to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is  
already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one  
gear is possible.  
Important!  
With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”,  
upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed  
depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature.  
This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more  
quickly to operating temperatures.  
Press and hold selector lever in the “D +” direction:  
The transmission will shift from the current gear range  
directly to gear range “D”.  
During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift  
and increased engine noise might be perceived as a  
malfunction. However, neither the engine nor  
transmission are negatively affected by this mode of  
operation.  
Warning!  
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order  
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive  
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your  
vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of  
control.  
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds  
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine  
temperatures below 95°F (35°C).  
To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when  
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily  
loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when  
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best  
torque range.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gear ranges:  
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for  
Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in  
mountainous regions or under extreme operating  
conditions. This gear selection will allow use of  
the engine’s braking power when descending  
steep grades.  
performance driving.  
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for  
moderately steep hills. Since the transmission  
does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear  
selection will allow use of the engine’s braking  
power downhill.  
Use this position, which makes maximum use of  
the engine’s braking effect, while descending  
very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at  
speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).  
Note:  
To avoid overrevving the engine on rpm limit, the  
transmission will upshift automatically to the next  
higher gear as long as the vehicle is accelerating.  
Automatic transmission  
153  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
154  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Program mode selector switch  
S
Standard mode  
Press switch on symbol “S”. Use this mode for all  
regular driving.  
The vehicle starts out in 1st gear.  
Accelerator Operation:  
Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly  
(not into kickdown position) while driving  
continuously, rather than depressing the  
accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause  
the automatic transmission to shift down into a  
lower gear. This gear shifting process is  
dependent on the current vehicle speed.  
P27.60-2102-26  
Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing  
the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the  
engine’s braking power during performance  
driving.  
The transmission is provided with a selector switch for  
Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W”  
program modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W
Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode  
Emergency Operation  
(Limp Home Mode)  
Press switch on symbol “W”. The vehicle starts  
out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st  
gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down  
position.  
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no  
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating  
in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a  
malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be  
accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.  
The “W” mode helps to improve traction and  
driving stability of the vehicle.  
The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle  
and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode.  
In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be  
activated.  
Caution!  
To engage 2nd gear or reverse:  
Never change the program mode when the selector lever  
is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of  
driving characteristics for which you may not be  
prepared.  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.  
3. Turn off the engine.  
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.  
5. Restart the engine.  
Important!  
Always be certain of the program mode selected since  
the vehicle driving characteristics change with the  
selection of the program mode.  
6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or  
move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).  
Dependent on the program mode selector switch  
position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in  
position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes.  
Have the transmission checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Automatic transmission  
155  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
156  
Car care  
Index  
Parking brake  
Parking brake  
To engage, firmly pull up brake handle (1). When the  
key is in steering lock position 2, the brake warning  
lamp in the instrument cluster should come on brightly.  
To release, slightly pull up handle while pushing lock  
button (2), and guide lever downward to its stop. The  
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should go  
out.  
A warning sounds, if you start to drive without having  
released the parking brake.  
2
Also see brake warning lamp on page 183.  
1
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the  
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock the  
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the  
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.  
Children could release the parking brake, which  
could result in an accident or serious injury.  
P42.20-2052-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving instructions  
Drinking and driving  
Warning!  
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel  
Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very  
dangerous combination. Even a small amount of  
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,  
perceptions and judgement.  
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving  
habits and operating conditions.  
To save fuel you should:  
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is  
sharply increased when you drink or take drugs  
and drive.  
keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,  
remove unnecessary loads,  
allow engine to warm up under low load use,  
avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,  
Please don‘t drink or take drugs and drive or allow  
anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs.  
have all maintenance work performed at regular  
Pedals  
intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Warning!  
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold  
weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly  
country.  
Keep driver‘s foot area clear at all times. Objects  
stored in this area may impair pedal movement.  
Driving instructions  
157  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
158  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Power assistance  
The condition of the parking brake system is checked  
each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required  
maintenance service.  
Warning!  
If the parking brake is released and the brake warning  
lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid  
level in the reservoir is too low.  
When the engine is not running, the brake and  
steering systems are without power assistance.  
Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is  
necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.  
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the  
reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.  
Brakes  
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.  
Warning!  
All checks and service work on the brake system should  
be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
After driving in heavy rain for some time without  
applying the brakes or through water deep enough  
to wet brake components, the first braking action  
may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal  
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected  
braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance  
from vehicles in front.  
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by  
Mercedes-Benz.  
Warning!  
If other than recommended brake pads are  
installed, or other than recommended brake fluid  
is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be  
degraded to an extent that safe braking is  
substantially impaired. This could result in an  
accident.  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause  
excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.  
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby  
significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may  
not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time  
to avoid an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution!  
Parking  
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the  
load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use  
the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent  
Warning!  
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of  
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine  
and leaving the vehicle, always:  
overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.  
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some  
time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream  
will cool down the brakes faster.  
1. Keep right foot on the service brake pedal.  
2. Firmly engage parking brake.  
3. Move the selector lever to position “P”  
(manual transmission: first or reverse gear).  
Driving off  
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after  
driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road  
is clear of other traffic.  
4. Slowly release the service brake pedal.  
5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.  
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on  
the engine until the operating temperature has been  
reached.  
6. Turn the key to steering lock position 0 and  
remove.  
7. Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.  
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one  
drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP  
switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the  
drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
Driving instructions  
159  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
160  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Important!  
Tires  
It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever  
parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move  
selector lever to position “P” (manual transmission:  
first or reverse gear).  
Warning!  
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride  
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to  
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the  
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and  
drive with caution to an area which is a safe  
distance from the roadway.  
When parking on hills, always set the parking brake.  
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible  
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have  
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or  
tire dealer for repairs.  
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These  
indicators are located in six places on the tread  
circumference and become visible at a tread depth of  
approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is  
considered worn and should be replaced.  
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across  
the tread.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This  
applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high  
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient  
temperatures).  
Warning!  
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the  
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose  
control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat  
tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will  
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.  
Aquaplaning  
Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road,  
aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with  
new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in  
the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.  
Warning!  
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As  
tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the  
adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply  
reduced.  
Depending upon the weather and/or road surface  
(conditions), the tire traction varies widely.  
Driving instructions  
161  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
162  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Tire traction  
Tire speed rating  
Vehicles without Sport Package:  
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is  
always lower than on a dry road.  
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “V”-rated tires,  
which have a speed rating of 149 mph (240 km/h).  
You should pay particular attention to the condition of  
the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to  
the freezing point.  
Vehicles with Sport Package only:  
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Z”-rated tires,  
which are permissible for speeds over 149 mph  
(240 km/h).  
Warning!  
Despite the tire rating, local speed limits should be  
obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to  
prevailing conditions.  
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be  
substantially reduced. Under such weather  
conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme  
caution.  
Warning!  
We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter  
season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced  
handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can  
reduce your stopping distance as compared with  
summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still  
considerably greater than when the road is not snow or  
ice covered.  
Even when permitted by law, never operate a  
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed  
rating of the tires.  
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are  
rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of  
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury  
and possible death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Snow chains  
Winter driving instructions  
Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended  
by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.  
The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to  
drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking  
and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control  
system under such conditions.  
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow  
the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.  
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move  
selector lever to position “N” or in case of manual  
transmission declutch. Try to keep the vehicle under  
control by corrective steering action.  
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered  
roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).  
Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on  
roads without snow.  
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking  
efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary  
to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore  
recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically  
when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can  
bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to  
normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done  
without endangering other drivers on the road.  
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control  
switch to OFF, see page 175.  
Important!  
Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire size  
225/50 R 16, with the collapsible spare tire, or with tire  
size 245/40 ZR 17 (Sport Package).  
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated  
roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as  
possible after driving is resumed while observing the  
safety rules in the previous paragraph.  
Driving instructions  
163  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
164  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Warning!  
Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp  
cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a  
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze  
which is formulated for below freezing  
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure  
that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and  
from around the vehicle with engine running.  
Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may  
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness  
and death.  
temperatures, see page 199.  
Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing  
ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps  
to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low  
ambient temperatures.  
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a  
window slightly on the side of the vehicle not  
facing the wind.  
Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on  
all four wheels for the winter season. Observe  
permissible maximum speed for M+S rated radial-  
ply tires and the legal speed limit.  
Winter driving  
Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter.  
Note:  
Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil  
which is not approved for winter operation. For  
viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity,  
see page 266.  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
antilock brake system (ABS) or electronic stability  
program (ESP) can only be achieved with M+S rated  
radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by  
Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance.  
Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze  
concentration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Block heater (for Canada only)  
Passenger compartment  
Warning!  
The engine is equipped with a block heater.  
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Always fasten items being carried as securely as  
possible.  
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden  
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around  
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle  
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in  
the vehicle.  
Deep water  
Caution!  
Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown  
depth.  
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.  
If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to  
prevent water from entering the engine compartment or  
passenger compartment, being ingested by the air  
intake, possibly causing damage to electrical  
components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is  
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Traveling abroad  
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service  
network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas  
which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz  
Center directory, you should request pertinent  
information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
Driving instructions  
165  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
166  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
Cruise control  
1 Accelerate and set:  
Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to  
accelerate.  
2 Decelerate and set:  
Depress lever briefly to set speed.  
Hold lever down to decelerate.  
Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired  
speed with the accelerator.  
Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to  
position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be  
released.  
The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by  
using the accelerator. After the accelerator is  
released, the previously set speed will be resumed  
automatically.  
The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed  
manner, for example over long distances, as it  
automatically maintains the set speed by actively  
regulating the throttle setting.  
If a set speed is to be increased or decreased  
slightly, e. g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in  
position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or  
briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for  
increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  
increments. When the lever is released, the newly  
set speed remains.  
Any given speed above approximately 20 mph  
(30 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by  
operating the lever.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Canceling  
4 Resume  
If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when  
To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to  
position 3.  
driving at a speed exceeding approximately 20 mph  
(30 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which  
was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise  
control. The last memorized speed is canceled when  
the key in the steering lock is turned to position 1  
or 0.  
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle  
speed drops below approximately 20 mph  
(30 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the  
cruise control will be canceled.  
If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains  
inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the  
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center as soon as possible.  
Important!  
Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the  
cruise control off.  
Driving systems  
167  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
168  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
Notes:  
Warning!  
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently  
while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the  
cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the  
following will assist in maintaining the set cruise  
controlled speed:  
Only use the cruise control if the traffic and  
weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a  
steady speed.  
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  
winding roads or in heavy traffic because  
conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady  
speed.  
Vehicles with automatic transmission:  
Downshift occurs (max. to 3rd gear) to maintain the set  
cruise controlled speed by using the engine’s braking  
power.  
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion  
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.  
As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission  
shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.  
The “Resume” function should only be operated if  
the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed  
and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.  
Vehicles with manual transmission:  
The set cruise controlled speed is switched off when  
declutching exceeds four seconds during downshifting a  
gear.  
Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the  
brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control  
is switched off.  
Use the lever to resume the previously set speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake assist system (BAS)  
Warning!  
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking  
capability during emergency braking maneuvers by  
having maximum power boost applied to the brakes  
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than  
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s  
braking style. This can help reduce braking distances  
over what ordinary driving and braking style might do.  
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).  
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase  
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the  
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the  
traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, following another vehicle too  
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and  
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The  
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never  
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the  
safety of others.  
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum  
BAS assistance.  
To receive the benefit of the system you must apply  
continuous full braking power during the stopping  
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.  
Driving systems  
169  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
170  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the BAS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
BAS is operational.  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined  
with the BAS malfunction indicator lamp.  
The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in steering  
lock position 2 and should go out with the engine  
running.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  
with the engine running.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
permanently while the engine is running, a malfunction  
has been detected in either system. As a result, it is  
possible that now only partial engine output will be  
available, and pressing the accelerator pedal will  
require more effort. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake  
system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.  
If the malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated,  
have the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Antilock brake system (ABS)  
Warning!  
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a  
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,  
indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep  
firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while  
experiencing the pulsation.  
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm,  
steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake  
pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly  
reduces braking effectiveness.  
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in  
applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking  
power and ability to steer the vehicle.  
Important!  
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep  
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this  
manner only can the ABS be most effective.  
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during  
hard braking maneuvers.  
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even  
with light brake pedal pressure because of the  
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating  
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road  
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra  
care while driving.  
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a  
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)  
independent of road surface conditions.  
Driving systems  
171  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
172  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
ABS control  
If the malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated, have  
the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center as soon as possible.  
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in steering  
lock position 2 and should go out with the engine  
running.  
Warning!  
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase  
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded  
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or  
the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, following another vehicle too  
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and  
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The  
capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never  
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the  
safety of others.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on while the engine is  
running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a  
malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake  
system functions in the usual manner, but without  
antilock assistance.  
For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 186.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  
with the engine running.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
ABS is operational.  
Note:  
To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions  
you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as  
appropriate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electronic stability program (ESP)  
Warning!  
Important!  
If the ESP warning lamp v flashes:  
During take-off apply as little throttle as possible.  
While driving ease up on the accelerator.  
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the  
traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe,  
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.  
The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must  
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or  
the safety of others.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
Do not switch off the ESP.  
Caution!  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see  
page 224), the engine must be shut off (key in steering  
lock position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will  
immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel  
brakes.  
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces  
driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving  
conditions.  
Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by  
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a  
countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also  
limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the  
speedometer dial, starts to flash.  
Driving systems  
173  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
174  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
Notes:  
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the  
wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP  
may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer  
dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the  
spare wheel, must have the same tire size.  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined  
with that of the BAS.  
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster and the yellow ESP warning  
lamp v in the speedometer dial come on with the  
key in steering lock position 2. They should go out with  
the engine running.  
When testing the parking brake on a brake test  
dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise,  
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the  
rear wheel brakes.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction  
has been detected in either system. Only partial engine  
output will be available.  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended  
M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains.  
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in  
the usual manner, but without BAS.  
Synchronizing ESP  
If the power supply was interrupted (battery  
disconnected or empty), the BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp may be illuminated with the engine  
running.  
Have the BAS or ESP checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched  
off.  
Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to  
the right. The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp  
should go out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESP Control switch  
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with  
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,  
switch off ESP by pressing the upper half (1) of the ESP  
switch. The ESP warning lamp v, located in the  
speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated.  
Warning!  
When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated  
continuously, the ESP is switched off.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque  
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced  
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.  
ESP control switch located in center console.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
1 Press to switch ESP off  
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer  
dial, comes on.  
A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with  
the switch in the OFF position.  
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the  
brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient  
traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds  
up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches  
off at 50 mph (80 km/h).  
2 Press to switch ESP on  
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer  
dial, goes out.  
Driving systems  
175  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
176  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
Note:  
Warning!  
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause  
serious damage to the drive train which is not covered  
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
ESP should not be switched off during normal  
driving other than in circumstances described  
above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle  
stability in standard driving maneuvers.  
The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial,  
starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires  
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.  
Important!  
If the ESP warning lamp flashes:  
during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible.  
while driving, ease up on the accelerator.  
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by  
ESP: press lower half of the switch (the ESP warning  
lamp in the speedometer dial goes out).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What you should know at the gas station  
See page 244 for notes on fuel filler flap, manual  
release.  
Fuel  
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully  
insert filler nozzle unit.  
Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out —  
do not top up or overfill.  
P88.60-2028-21  
Warning!  
Fuel supply  
Warning!  
Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating  
pressure in the system which could cause a gas  
discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon  
removing the filler nozzle which could cause  
personal injury.  
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It  
burns violently and can cause serious injury.  
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling  
fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking  
materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking  
materials near gasoline!  
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate.  
Fuel tank capacity approximately 15.8 US gal (60.0 l).  
This includes approximately 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) reserve.  
Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap  
to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in  
tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to  
remove slowly could result in personal injury.  
Use premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane  
Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON).  
What you should know at the gas station  
177  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
178  
Car care  
Index  
What you should know at the gas station  
Engine oil  
Air conditioner  
Engine oil level check, see page 197.  
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, see  
page 266.  
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking  
level: 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).  
Bulbs  
Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service  
Products sheet.  
High and low beams (Halogen): H7 (55 W),  
fog lamps: H1 (55 W),  
turn signal lamps, parking and standing lamps, front:  
2357 NA (28.5/8.3 W/30/2.2 cp),  
side marker lamps, front: 5 W/4 cp  
stop lamps: 1154 21 W/32 cp,  
Coolant  
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water  
quality).  
backup lamps: 1154 21 W/32 cp,  
For further information (e.g. anticorrosion/antifreeze),  
see page 270.  
turn signal lamps, rear: 1156 NA 21 W/24cp,  
tail, parking and standing lamps: 67 5 W/4cp,  
rear fog lamp, driver´s side: 1155 21 W/32 cp,  
license plate lamps: C 5 W  
Spark plugs  
Approved spark plugs, see page 264.  
Xenon bulb for low beam: D2R (35 W)  
Tire pressure  
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the  
fuel filler flap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check regularly and before a long trip  
1 Windshield washer and  
headlamp cleaning system  
For refilling reservoir, see page 199.  
2 Coolant level  
See “Adding coolant” on page 198.  
3 Engine oil level  
See “Checking engine oil level” on page 197 and  
“Engine oil level indicator” on page 79.  
4 Brake fluid  
See “Brake fluid” on page 268.  
Opening hood, see page 194.  
Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For  
replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on  
page 230.  
SLK 230 Kompressor shown  
Exterior lamp switch, see page 81.  
Check regularly and before a long trip  
179  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) indicator lamp ..................184  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap  
Low windshield and headlamp  
washer system fluid level  
warning lamp ..............................187  
Instrument cluster display  
Malfunction and  
indicator lamps in the  
placement warning ....................185  
Low engine oil level  
instrument cluster ....................182  
On-board diagnostic system .....182  
Check engine malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................182  
Brake warning lamp ..................183  
Brake pad wear  
indicator lamp .............................184  
Seat belt nonusage  
warning lamp ..............................184  
warning lamp ..............................188  
Charge indicator lamp ...............188  
Exterior lamp failure i  
ndicator lamp ..............................189  
Additional function  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP) — warning lamp ................185  
BAS / ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................185  
ABS malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................186  
Telescoping steering column  
indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display) ..........189  
warning lamp ..............................186 Malfunction and indicator lamp  
in the center console ................190  
Low engine coolant level  
warning lamp ..............................187  
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .....190  
Contents - Instrument cluster display  
Instruments  
181  
Instrument  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
and controls  
cluster display  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
182  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
in the instrument cluster  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuously  
and / or the vehicle is not driving normally, serious  
damage can occur to the emission system. Please  
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
immediately.  
General information:  
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up  
during the bulb self-check when turning the key in  
steering lock to position 2, have it checked and replaced  
if necessary.  
The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control  
module monitors emission control components that  
either provide input signals to or receive output signals  
from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from  
interruptions or failure of any of these components are  
indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are  
simultaneously stored in the SFI control module.  
On-board diagnostic system  
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp  
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the  
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator  
lamp comes on when the engine is running,  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp  
comes on, have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management  
system, emission control system, systems which impact  
emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the  
fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated  
continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you  
may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we  
recommend that you have the system checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
With some exceptions, the control module switches off  
the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the  
condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists  
during three consecutive cycles. See also page 185 for  
fuel cap placement warning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the  
passenger compartment near the engine hood release,  
allowing the accurate identification of system  
malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble  
codes.  
Warning!  
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated  
can result in an accident. Have your brake system  
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp  
stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the  
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir  
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine  
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be  
seriously burned.  
Brake warning lamp  
Except Canada  
Note:  
Canada only  
If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid  
reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for  
brake pad thickness and leaks.  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the brake  
warning lamp will come on. It should go out when the  
engine is running.  
The brake warning lamp will come on:  
when there is insufficient brake fluid in the  
reservoir (engine running and parking brake  
released), or  
when the parking brake is set (engine running).  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
183  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
184  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Brake pad wear indicator lamp  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
brake pad wear indicator lamp comes on. It  
goes out when the engine is running.  
The operational readiness of the airbag  
system is verified by the indicator lamp  
“SRS” in the instrument cluster when  
turning the key in steering lock to position 1 or 2. If no  
fault is detected, the lamp will go out after  
approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the  
system continues to monitor the components and  
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  
malfunction by coming on again.  
If the indicator lamp lights up during braking, this  
indicates that the brake pads are worn down.  
Have the brake system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Seat belt nonusage warning lamp  
Warning!  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
seat belt warning lamp comes on, and a  
warning sounds for a short time if the  
driver’s seat belt is not fastened.  
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated  
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be  
operational. For your safety, we strongly  
recommend that you visit an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the  
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be  
activated when needed in an accident, which could  
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy  
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also  
result in injury.  
After starting the engine, the seat belt warning lamp  
blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and  
passengers to fasten seat belts.  
See page 54 for notes on airbags, see page 53 for belt  
tensioners and page 44 for infant and child seat  
restraint.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement warning  
Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the fuel reserve  
warning lamp comes on. It should go out immediately  
when the engine is running.  
The yellow ESP warning lamp in the  
speedometer dial comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2. It should go out  
with engine running.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that  
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of  
approximately 2.1 gal (8 liters).  
See page 173 if the warning lamp lights up or flashes  
when the vehicle is moving.  
The warning lamp blinks when the fuel cap is not  
closed, or a fuel system leak has been detected.  
Retighten cap and see if warning lamp goes out after  
restart and next OBD selfcheck.  
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP  
is combined with that of the BAS.  
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2. It should go out with the engine  
running.  
If the warning lamp continues to blink after closing the  
fuel cap correctly, have the fuel system checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  
also cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see  
also page 182.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
continuously with the engine running, see page 169  
and 173.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
185  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
186  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
ABS malfunction indicator lamp  
Telescoping steering column warning lamp  
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2 and should go out  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster  
comes on. It should go out when the engine  
is running.  
ABS  
with the engine running.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and  
warning in the instrument cluster come on while the  
engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected  
a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the  
brake system functions in the usual manner, but  
without antilock assistance.  
If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, the adjustable steering column is not locked  
properly.  
Important!  
Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked  
the steering column.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  
with the engine running.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
ABS is operational.  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
See page 171 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Low engine coolant level warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
Warning!  
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.  
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.  
You can be seriously burned.  
warning lamp comes on. It should go out  
when the engine is running.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then the coolant  
level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks  
are noticeable and the engine temperature does not  
increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station  
and have coolant added to the coolant system, see  
page 198.  
Low windshield and headlamp washer system fluid  
level warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
warning lamp comes on. It should go out  
when the engine is running.  
The low engine coolant level warning light should not be  
ignored. Extended driving with the light illuminated  
may cause serious engine damage not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, the level of the  
reservoir has dropped to approximately 1/3 of the total  
volume. The reservoir should be refilled with MB  
Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperature -  
see page 199) at the next opportunity. The reservoir for  
the windshield and headlamp washer systems is located  
in the engine compartment.  
In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have  
the cooling system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Note:  
Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The  
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.  
Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
187  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
188  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Low engine oil level warning lamp  
Charge indicator lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
oil level warning lamp comes on. It should  
go out immediately when the engine is  
running.  
Should the charge indicator lamp fail to  
come on prior to starting when the key is in  
steering lock position 2 or should it fail to go  
out after starting or during operation, this indicates a  
malfunction which must be repaired immediately at an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or comes on with the engine running and at  
operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped  
to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.  
If the charge indicator lamp comes on, or a loss of power  
steering assistance is noticeable while the engine is  
running, this may indicate that one of the two poly-V-  
belts has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-  
V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the  
vehicle. Otherwise, the engine may overheat due to an  
inoperative water pump which may result in damage to  
the engine.  
When this occurs, the warning lamp will first come on  
intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops  
further.  
If no leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest  
service station where the engine oil should be topped to  
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.  
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with the charge  
indicator lamp illuminated. Doing so could result in  
serious engine damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
The low engine oil level warning light should not be  
ignored. Extended driving with the light illuminated  
could result in serious engine damage that is not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
In addition to the warning lamp, the engine oil level  
should be periodically checked with the dipstick, for  
example during a fuel stop, or before a long trip, see  
page 197.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior lamp failure indicator lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, an  
Additional function indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display)  
indicator lamp comes on. It should go out  
when the engine is running.  
FSS indicator (distance, Service A),  
see page 77.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, this lamp  
indicates a failure in the parking lamp, taillamp, stop  
lamp, or low beam headlamp.  
FSS indicator (distance, Service B)  
see page 77.  
FSS indicator (days, Service A), see page 77.  
FSS indicator (days, Service B), see page 77.  
Start lock-out malfunction, see page 23.  
If an exterior lamp fails, the indicator lamp will come on  
only when that lamp is switched on.  
If a brake lamp fails, the lamp failure indicator will  
come on when applying the brake and stays on until the  
engine is turned off.  
Note:  
If additional lighting equipment is installed (e.g.  
auxiliary headlamps etc.) be certain to connect into the  
fuse before the failure indicator monitoring unit in  
order to avoid damaging the system.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
189  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
190  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Malfunction and indicator lamp in the  
center console  
Warning!  
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will  
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to  
operate with it. It will not work with child seats  
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.  
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp  
The 7 indicator lamp will light up for approximately  
6 seconds when you turn the key in steering lock to  
position 1 or 2.  
Never place anything between seat cushion and  
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the  
effectiveness of the deactivation system.  
It does not light up if there is a fault in the system.  
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for  
installation of special child seats.  
The 7 indicator lamp stays lit as long as a  
BabySmartTM child seat is properly installed on the front  
passenger seat. It indicates that the front passenger  
airbag is switched off.  
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if  
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.  
Please be sure to check the indicator every time  
you use the special system child seat. Should the  
light go out while the restraint is installed, please  
check installation. If the light remains out, do not  
use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children  
on the passenger seat until the system has been  
repaired.  
See page 51 for BabySmartTM airbag and its deactivation  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle jack  
(except SLK 32 AMG) .............. 201  
Storage box, TIREFIT-Kit,  
Battery .............................................220  
Jump starting ..................................222  
Towing the vehicle .........................224  
Transmission selector lever,  
manually unlocking ..................229  
Exterior lamps ................................230  
Headlamp assembly ...................231  
Taillamp assemblies ..................234  
Changing batteries in  
Practical hints  
First aid kit ..................................... 192  
Stowing items in the vehicle ........192  
Fuses ................................................ 192  
Hood ................................................. 194  
Automatic transmission  
fluid level ...................................196  
Checking engine oil level ............. 197  
Coolant level ...................................198  
Adding coolant ...........................198  
Windshield and  
air pump, Vehicle tools  
(SLK 32 AMG only) .................. 202  
Wheels ............................................ 203  
Tire replacement .......................203  
Rotating wheels ......................... 204  
Spare wheel ....................................205  
Spare wheel bolts ......................206  
Changing wheels ...........................207  
Inflating the collapsible  
spare tire ......................................212  
Storing spare wheel in  
the remote control ....................236  
Synchronizing  
remote control ............................237  
Raising hardtop manually ............238  
Replacing wiper blade insert .......243  
Antenna ...........................................244  
Manual release  
headlamp washer system ........199  
Air pump, spare wheel,  
vehicle tools,  
wheel well ....................................213  
TIREFIT ............................................214  
Tire inflation pressure ..................219  
storage compartment  
(except SLK 32 AMG) ...............200  
of fuel filler flap ........................244  
Contents - Practical hints  
191  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
192  
Car care  
Index  
First aid kit  
First aid kit  
Fuses  
The first aid kit is located in the left side panel of the  
trunk.  
Before replacing a blown fuse, determine the cause of  
the short circuit.  
Spare fuses are supplied inside the main and auxiliary  
fuse boxes. Observe amperage and color of fuse.  
Stowing items in the vehicle  
Warning!  
A special fuse puller is supplied with the vehicle tools.  
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to  
repair or bridge a blown fuse.  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing  
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  
possible.  
A fuse chart can be found inside the corresponding fuse  
box cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
1
P82.00-2050-26  
P82.00-2064-26  
1 Main fuse box in engine compartment (contains  
2 Auxiliary fuse box to left of exterior lamp switch  
fuses for interior consumers)  
(fuses for lights)  
To gain access to the main fuse box (1), release  
clamp (arrow), lift the fuse box cover up and  
remove it.  
To gain access, turn locks (arrows) using a coin, and  
remove cover.  
To close the main fuse box, engage back end of cover  
and let front end snap into place.  
Fuses  
193  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
194  
Car care  
Index  
Engine compartment  
Hood  
The engine is equipped with a transistorized  
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is  
dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils,  
spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the  
ignition system  
Warning!  
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of  
moving parts when the hood is open and the engine  
is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed  
before driving. When closing hood, use extreme  
caution not to catch hands or fingers.  
• with the engine running,  
• while starting the engine,  
• if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned  
manually.  
The radiator fan may continue to run for  
approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the  
engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan  
blades.  
If you see flames, steam or smoke coming from the  
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature  
gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do  
not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do  
not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If  
necessary, call a fire department.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
3
2
P88.40-2065-26  
To open:  
Pull handle (2) up and open hood.  
To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the  
driver’s side of the instrument panel.  
Lower hood and let it drop into lock from a height of  
approximately 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed  
flat on edges of hood (3).  
Caution!  
To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is  
fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not  
push down on hood to attempt to fully close it.  
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open  
the hood only with wipers in the parked position.  
Engine compartment  
195  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
196  
Car care  
Index  
Engine compartment  
Automatic transmission fluid level  
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic  
transmission fluid.  
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and  
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is  
omitted.  
If you notice fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,  
have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the  
transmission fluid level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking engine oil level  
Wipe oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil  
level. Fully insert dipstick in tube, and remove after  
three seconds to obtain accurate reading.  
2
Oil level must be between the lower  
(min) and upper (max) mark of the  
dipstick.  
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking  
level is approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0l).  
1
Do not overfill the engine.  
Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could  
cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
P18.40-2047-26  
1 Oil dipstick  
For low engine oil level warning, see page 188.  
2 Oil filler cap  
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level  
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.  
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after  
stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the  
oil pan.  
Checking engine oil level  
197  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
198  
Car care  
Index  
Coolant level  
Coolant level  
page 270. The drain plugs for the cooling system are  
located on the right side of the engine block and at the  
bottom of the radiator.  
Warning!  
In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury:  
• Use extreme caution when opening the hood if  
there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking  
from the cooling system, or if the coolant  
temperature gauge indicates that the engine is  
overheated.  
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant  
reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F  
(90°C). Allow engine to cool down before  
removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains  
hot fluid and is under pressure.  
P20.20-2052-26  
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked  
on level ground and the engine stopped.  
• Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately  
1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened  
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will  
be blown out under pressure.  
Check coolant level only when coolant is cold.  
Adding coolant  
If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and  
MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added. Refill  
coolant until the float in the reservoir reaches and  
closes the filler opening. Anticorrosion/antifreeze, see  
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.  
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine  
parts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield and headlamp washer system  
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio  
For temperatures above freezing:  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.  
1 part “S” to 100 parts water  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water)  
1
For temperature below freezing:  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze.  
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).  
P82.35-2051-26  
1 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir  
Capacity approximately 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)  
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield  
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient  
temperatures).  
Windshield and headlamp washer system  
199  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
200  
Car care  
Index  
Air pump, spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage compartment  
Air pump, spare wheel, vehicle tools, storage  
1 Vehicle tools  
compartment (except SLK 32 AMG)  
2 Wheel bolt wrench  
3 Spare wheel and wheel bolts  
4 Air pump (electric. 12 V), Bolts for spare wheel rim  
5 Vehicle jack  
Raise roof, open luggage cover, and move aside trunk  
floor.  
3
To remove air pump:  
Unbuckle strap and remove air pump from holder.  
1
To remove spare wheel:  
4
2
First remove air pump, then turn pump holder  
counterclockwise and remove spare wheel.  
To store spare wheel:  
5
Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure it with  
pump holder. Turn pump holder clockwise to its stop.  
Reinstall air pump.  
P58.10-2025-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle jack (except SLK 32 AMG)  
Warning!  
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  
vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the  
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack  
only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.  
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported  
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area  
under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking  
brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with  
jack.  
3
2
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical  
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use  
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm  
is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the  
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before  
working under the vehicle.  
1
P58.10-2019-26  
1 Jack base  
2 Handle  
3 Pin  
See illustration for proper storage of jack.  
Before storing the jack in its holder in the spare wheel  
well, lower jack arm and fold in handle and pin.  
Vehicle jack  
201  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
202  
Car care  
Index  
Storage box, TIREFIT-Kit, air pump, vehicle tools  
Storage box, TIREFIT-Kit, air pump, vehicle tools  
(SLK 32 AMG only)  
1 Electric Air pump  
2 TIREFIT-Kit  
3 Vehicle tool kit, Jack  
Lift trunk floor cover.  
Open storage box cover.  
Notes:  
The vehicle tool kit and tire wrench are located under  
the rug on the right side.  
To use TIREFIT and air pump, see page 214  
3
2
1
P58.10-2026-27  
The storage box is located below the trunk floor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wheels  
Tire replacement  
Replace rims or tires with the same designation,  
manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.  
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further  
information.  
Tires should be replaced in sets. Rims and tires must be  
of the correct size and type. For dimensions, see  
page 261.  
We recommend that you break in new tires for  
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for  
information on tested and recommended rims and tires  
for summer and winter operation. They can also offer  
advice concerning tire service and purchase.  
approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.  
It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be  
fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm)  
whenever wheels are mounted.  
For rim and tire specifications, see page 261.  
Warning!  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread  
is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained  
damage, replace them.  
When replacing rims, use only genuine  
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the  
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in  
the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.  
Tires, wheels  
203  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
204  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
Rotating wheels  
Notes:  
Wheel rotation applies only when winter tires are  
mounted on all four wheels.  
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time  
you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside.  
The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of  
tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.  
The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread  
tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics  
and safety of the vehicle.  
Rotating, however, should be carried out as  
recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the  
characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front  
wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes  
visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.  
Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and  
damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for  
damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be  
checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove  
burrs, if any.  
Important!  
Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after  
rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see  
page 219.  
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  
movement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spare wheel  
Important!  
In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the  
spare wheel, while observing the following restrictions:  
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).  
SLK 230 Kompressor:  
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the  
The spare wheel rim size is 4 1/2 B x 15 H 2 with  
inflatable, collapsible tire, size 165-15 89 P.  
flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.  
Do not operate vehicle with more than one  
SLK 320:  
collapsible spare wheel/tire mounted.  
The spare wheel rim size is 4 1/2 B x 16 H 2 with  
inflatable, collapsible tire, size 165/70-16 92 P.  
For additional information, see page 261.  
You should inflate the spare tire using the supplied air  
pump.  
Note:  
The model SLK 32 AMG is equipped with TIREFIT,  
see page 214.  
Tires, wheels  
205  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
206  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
Spare wheel bolts  
Note:  
Wheel bolts (2) must be used when mounting spare  
wheel rim size 4 1/2 B x 15 H 2.  
1
2
Warning!  
Be sure to use the original length wheel bolts when  
remounting the original wheel after it has been  
repaired.  
P40.10-2154-26  
1 Wheel bolt for wheel rim size 7 J x 16 H 2  
and 8 J x 16 H 2  
Wheel bolt for AMG wheel rim size 7 1/2 J x 17 H 2  
and 8 1/2 J x 17 H 2  
Wheel bolt for spare wheel rim size 4 1/2 B x 16 H 2  
2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel rim size 4 1/2 B x 15 H 2  
(located with tire air pump)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing wheels  
Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance  
from the roadway.  
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  
vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the  
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack  
only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.  
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported  
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area  
under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking  
brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with  
jack.  
1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning  
flasher.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off  
engine (manual transmission to 1st or reverse gear).  
3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking  
wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with  
vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When  
changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the  
downhill side blocking both wheels of the other  
axle. On a level road, place one chock in front of and  
one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to  
the wheel being changed.  
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical  
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use  
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm  
is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the  
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before  
working under the vehicle.  
Tires, wheels  
207  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
208  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
4. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the  
wheel bolts.  
5. Remove the protective cover from the jack support  
tube opening by inserting the screwdriver (supplied  
in the tool kit) in the opening and prying it out.  
The tube openings are located directly behind the  
front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel  
housings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Holding the jack, unfold pin (1) and handle (2).  
Insert pin fully into the tube hole up to the stop.  
Crank handle clockwise until jack base (3) meets  
the ground. Place jack on firm ground. Position the  
jack so that it is always vertical (plump-line) as seen  
from the side (see arrow), even if the vehicle is  
parked on an incline.  
8. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and screw in  
alignment pin (4) supplied in the tool kit. Remove  
the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected  
from dirt and sand.  
9. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep  
hands from beneath the wheels.  
7. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the  
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.  
Tires, wheels  
209  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
210  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
Important!  
Important!  
For ease of handling and proper unfolding of tire during  
its inflation when installing spare wheel with  
collapsible tire, first mount the spare wheel, then inflate  
the tire.  
When installing spare wheel with collapsible tire, make  
certain to use the correct wheel bolts, supplied in the  
vehicle tool kit.  
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and  
hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.  
10. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.  
Install wheel on wheel hub. Insert proper wheel  
bolts and tighten them snugly.  
12. Lower vehicle. Remove jack and insert jack tube  
cover.  
Unscrew the alignment pin (4) to install the last  
wheel bolt.  
11. Inflate collapsible spare tire. (See next page for  
detailed instructions).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning!  
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or  
rusted.  
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.  
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired  
immediately.  
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened  
mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off.  
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the  
correct mounting bolts.  
Notes:  
13. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly,  
following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are  
tight. Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb.  
(110 Nm).  
Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with  
pin and handle folded in.  
The removed road wheel can be stored under the  
luggage cover in a protective cover supplied with  
vehicle. The collapsible spare wheel should be returned  
to the wheel well.  
14. Ensure proper tire pressure.  
Tires, wheels  
211  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
212  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
Inflating the collapsible spare tire  
(SLK 230 Kompressor and SLK 320 only)  
1. Remove air pump from storage compartment inside  
trunk.  
2. Open lid and pull out air hose with pressure gauge  
and electrical plug.  
Mercedes-Benz  
Observe instructions on air pump label.  
Warning!  
To prevent possible injury when unscrewing air  
pump filler hose from tire valve after inflating the  
tire, use a rag since the tire valve could be hot.  
2
3. Unscrew tire valve cap from spare wheel tire valve.  
4. Screw filler hose onto tire valve.  
3
1
P40.10-2124-26  
5. Plug air pump electrical plug into vehicle cigar  
lighter.  
The air pump is located inside the wheel well in the  
trunk.  
6. To switch on air pump, turn key in steering lock to  
position 1.  
1 Filler hose  
2 Electrical plug  
Important!  
3 Pressure gauge with vent screw  
Do not start engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Operate air pump (approximately 5 minutes) until  
pressure gauge displays 36 psi (2.5 bar).  
Storing spare wheel in wheel well  
Deflate spare tire:  
8. To switch off air pump, turn key in steering lock to  
position 0.  
1. Unscrew valve stem removal tool, which is a part of  
the valve cap, from tire valve.  
9. Unscrew filler hose from tire. Reinstall tire valve  
cap.  
2. Using the valve stem removal tool, open tire valve  
slightly by turning the tire valve insert  
counterclockwise to release air pressure.  
Note:  
Excessive tire air pressure should be released using the  
vent screw.  
3. When the tire air pressure has been released,  
remove tire valve insert (protect it from dirt and  
sand) using the previously removed tire valve cap.  
4. Once all air is out of the tire, and the tire has  
collapsed to its original shape, reinstall the tire  
valve insert and valve cap.  
Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure it with air  
pump holder. Turn pump holder clockwise to its stop.  
Tires, wheels  
213  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
214  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
TIREFIT  
(SLK 32 AMG only)  
Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed  
immediately with plenty of water.  
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread can be  
sealed with TIREFIT.  
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT, change  
clothing as soon as possible.  
Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) should not be  
removed from the tire.  
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a  
physician immediately.  
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to  
approx. -4°F (-20°C).  
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.  
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty  
of water and drink plenty of water.  
Warning!  
Do not induce vomiting!  
Cuts or punctures larger than approx. 0.16 in  
(4 mm), tire damage caused by driving with  
extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a  
damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving.  
TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances.  
Consult a physician immediately.  
Keep away from open flame or heat source.  
Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.  
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz Center for  
assistance.  
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to  
come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.  
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or  
absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye and  
respiratory irritation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sealing tire with TIREFIT  
1
1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning  
flasher.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off  
engine.  
3. Take TIREFIT out of storage box, see page 202.  
P40.10-2158-26  
4. Shake contents of TIREFIT container.  
Screw hose (1) on to TIREFIT container.  
TIREFIT is now ready for use.  
Tires, wheels  
215  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
216  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
6. Remove plug (4) from end of hose (1) and push hose  
(1) onto valve stem.  
7. Hold container upside down (hose down) and  
squeeze entire contents of container into tire.  
8. Pull hose (1) off and screw tire valve (2) using valve  
stem tool (3) into the valve stem.  
Note:  
A spare tire valve is stored with the valve stem tool.  
9. Install plug (4) onto end of hose (1).  
5. Unscrew valve tire cap. Remove tire valve (2) using  
valve stem removal tool (3). Do not place tire valve in  
sand or dirt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Remove air pump from storage box inside trunk.  
12. Pull out air hose with pressure gauge (5) and  
electrical plug (6).  
13. Screw filler hose (5) onto tire valve.  
14. Plug air pump electrical plug (6) into vehicle cigar  
lighter.  
6
15. To switch on air pump, turn key in steering lock to  
position 1.  
Note:  
5
P40.10-2160-26  
After 5 minutes, pressure gauge must display  
26 psi (1.8 bar). Do not exceed the maximum pressure  
of 36 psi (2.5 bar)!  
10. The air pump is located inside the storage box,  
see page 202. Observe instructions on air pump  
label.  
If pressure is not attained, drive vehicle  
approx. 394 in (10 m), so that the sealing material is  
evenly distributed inside the tire. Reconnect air pump  
and inflate tire.  
Tires, wheels  
217  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
218  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, wheels  
Note:  
Warning!  
Do not operate electric air pump longer that 6 minutes  
without interruption. Air pump could overheat! After air  
pump has cooled off, operate air pump again.  
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).  
A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at  
higher speeds.  
Vehicle handling characteristics may change.  
16. To switch off air pump, turn key in steering lock to  
position 0.  
After driving vehicle for an initial 10 minutes,  
check tire pressure. If tire pressure has fallen  
below 20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the  
vehicle.  
Warning!  
If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained,  
tire is too severely damaged for TIREFIT to provide  
a reliable tire repair.  
If tire pressure is at least 20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate  
tire to correct pressure (see label on fuel filler  
flap), and drive vehicle to nearest tire repair  
facility to have tire repaired or replaced.  
In this case TIREFIT can not properly seal the tire.  
Do not drive the vehicle.  
Recommended duration of use: 300 miles (500 km)  
at 50 mph (80 km/h) with the recommended tire  
pressure.  
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or call  
Roadside Assistance.  
Notes:  
17. Reinstall valve tire cap.  
If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will  
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel  
components. Once TIREFIT sealing material had dried,  
it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.  
18. Drive vehicle to distribute the sealant evenly inside  
the tire.  
Replace TIREFIT every 4 years.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire inflation pressure  
Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values  
offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation  
pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling  
characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly  
permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will  
become somewhat harder.  
A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation  
pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended  
tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.  
Important!  
Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle  
speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked  
and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in  
warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the  
pressure listed in the table and the respective operating  
conditions are taken into consideration.  
Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar)  
per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in  
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage -  
especially in the winter.  
Example:  
If garage temperature = approximately +68°F (+20°C)  
and ambient temperature = approximately +32°F (0°C)  
then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure  
+3psi (+0.2 bar).  
An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a  
nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread  
separation, bulging etc.. Regular tire pressure checks at  
intervals of no more than 14 days are therefore  
essential.  
Tires, wheels  
219  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
220  
Car care  
Index  
Battery  
If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for  
damage.  
Battery  
Warning!  
The spare tire should be checked periodically for  
condition. Spare tire will age and become worn over  
time even if never used, and thus should be inspected  
and replaced when necessary.  
Failure to follow these instructions can result in  
severe injury or death.  
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you  
might get injured.  
Warning!  
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow  
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected  
area with water and seek medical help.  
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can  
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they  
are more likely to become punctured or damaged  
by road debris, potholes etc.. Follow recommended  
inflation pressures.  
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is  
flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks  
away from battery, avoid improper connection of  
jumper cables, smoking etc..  
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified  
vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label  
on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the  
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a  
blowout.  
Important!  
Battery replacement information:  
The maintenance-free battery is located in the engine  
compartment.  
The service life of the battery is dependent on its  
condition of charge. The battery should always be kept  
sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length  
of time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the  
battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if  
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than  
approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,  
mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for  
long periods of time.  
Battery recycling  
Batteries contain materials that can harm the  
environment with improper disposal.  
Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.  
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of  
disposal.  
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the  
battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s  
electrical circuit.  
Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old  
batteries for recycling.  
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and  
connect last.  
When removing and connecting the battery, always  
make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the  
key is in steering lock position 0. The battery must  
always be securely installed when the vehicle is in  
operation. During removal and installation always  
protect the disconnected battery positive (+) terminal  
with the cover attached to the battery.  
While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps  
must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the  
generator and other electronic components will be  
damaged.  
Battery  
221  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
222  
Car care  
Index  
Battery  
Jump starting  
Warning!  
Important!  
A discharged battery can freeze at approximately +14°F  
(–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before  
jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a  
frozen battery can result in exploding, causing personal  
injury.  
Failure to follow these directions will cause  
damage to the electronic components, and can lead  
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.  
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump  
starting, you might get injured.  
Jumper cable specifications:  
Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or  
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow  
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected  
area with water, and seek medical help if  
necessary.  
approximately 2 AWG  
Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).  
If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started  
with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another  
vehicle.  
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is  
flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or  
sparks away from battery, avoid improper  
connection of jumper cables, smoking etc..  
Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump  
starting with more powerful battery could damage the  
vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered  
by the Mercedes-benz Limited Warranty.  
Read all instructions before proceeding.  
The battery is located in the engine compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Proceed as follows:  
Important!  
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that  
the jumper cables will reach, but never let the  
vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not  
have loose or missing insulation.  
5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery  
and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not  
on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that will  
move when the engine is started. Allow the  
discharged battery to charge for a few minutes. Start  
engine of the disabled vehicle in the usual manner.  
2. On both vehicles:  
Turn off engine and all lights and accessories,  
6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables  
by exactly reversing the above installation  
sequence, starting with the last connection made  
first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it  
does not touch any other metal while the other end  
is still attached.  
except hazard warning flashers or work lights.  
Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to  
position “P” (manual transmission to Neutral).  
Important!  
3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the  
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and  
the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the  
charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps do not  
touch any other metal parts.  
Note:  
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful  
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic  
converter.  
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the  
grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged  
battery and the final connection to a grounded  
heavy metal bracket in the engine compartment or  
on the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
Jump starting  
223  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
224  
Car care  
Index  
Towing the vehicle  
Towing the vehicle  
The rear towing eye is located at the right, below the  
bumper. The front towing eye is located on the  
passenger-side behind the grille in the bumper panel.  
Grille removal for SLK 320 except Sport Package  
version:  
Hold left and right end of grille (1) and pull out.  
Grille removal for SLK 230 except Sport Package  
version:  
Hold grille (2), fold it down and pull out firmly.  
Grille installation for all except Sport Package version:  
Position grille and press in securely.  
1
2
P88.20-2111-26  
SLK 320  
except Sport Package  
SLK 230 Kompressor  
except Sport Package  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Grille removal for Sport Package version:  
Pull on top end of grille simultaneously pushing apron  
(arrow) up.  
Grille installation for Sport Package:  
Position bottom end of grille and press in securely  
simultaneously pushing apron (arrow) up.  
P88.00-2045-26  
Sport Package  
Towing the vehicle  
225  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
226  
Car care  
Index  
Towing the vehicle  
The threaded hole for the towing eye bolt is located on  
the passenger-side behind the grille in the bumper  
panel (3). The towing eye bolt is stored with the jack in  
the trunk.  
Installing towing eye:  
Grille removal for SLK 32 AMG. Hold grille (arrow) and  
pull forward to remove. Screw towing eye bolt into its  
stop and tighten with lug wrench.  
3
Removing towing eye bolt:  
Unscrew towing eye bolt and store in trunk. Fit grille  
into bumper and snap into place.  
P88.20-2166-26  
SLK 32 AMG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using  
flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other  
types of towing.  
Warning!  
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the  
ground make certain that the electronic key is in  
steering lock position 2.  
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Front towing  
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will  
damage radiator and supports. Rear towing with sling-  
type equipment over bumpy roads will damage the  
lower edge of the front bumper cover.  
With the engine not running, there is no power  
assistance for the braking and steering systems. In  
this case, it is important to keep in mind that a  
considerably higher degree of effort in necessary to  
brake and steer the vehicle.  
Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with key in  
steering lock turned to position 0.  
Important!  
Towing restrictions for vehicles with automatic  
transmission: The vehicle may be towed with all wheels  
on the ground and the selector lever in position “N” for  
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to  
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). The key must be in steering  
lock position 2.  
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:  
With the automatic central locking activated and the  
key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle doors lock if  
the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are  
turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph  
(15 km/h) or more.  
To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the  
transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft  
be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any  
towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.  
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,  
deactivate the automatic central locking.  
Towing the vehicle  
227  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
228  
Car care  
Index  
Towing the vehicle  
Note:  
Caution!  
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning  
flasher in use, turn key in steering lock to position 2 and  
activate combination switch for left or right turn signal  
in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will  
operate. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard  
warning flasher will operate again.  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the  
engine must be shut off (key in steering lock position 0  
or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged  
and will apply the rear wheel brakes. Switch off the  
tow-away alarm as well as the automatic central locking,  
see page 37 and page 31.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking  
To do so, insert a pin (1), e.g. ball point pen, into the  
covered opening below the position “D” of the shift  
pattern. While pushing the pin down, move selector  
lever from position “P”.  
1
After removal of the pin from the opening, the cover will  
not close fully. Only after moving the selector lever to  
positions “D+” and “D–” does the cover return to its  
closed position.  
P27.60-2101-26  
In the case of power failure the transmission selector  
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. when towing the  
vehicle.  
Towing the vehicle  
229  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
230  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
Exterior lamps  
Notes:  
To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off  
lamp prior to replacing a bulb.  
Replacing bulbs  
Warning!  
When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with  
the specified watt rating.  
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can  
explode if you:  
When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass  
portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a  
clean cloth.  
• touch or move it when hot,  
• drop the bulb,  
• scratch the bulb.  
Wear eye and hand protection.  
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is  
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the Lamp  
and its components. We recommend that you have  
such work done by a qualified technician.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamp assembly  
2
3
1
4
P82.10-2352-26  
P82.10-2351-26  
1 Bulb socket for turn signal, parking and  
3 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb  
standing lamp  
4 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb  
2 Headlamp cover with locking tab  
Exterior lamps  
231  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
232  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
Bulbs for high and low beam  
H 7 (55 W)  
Xenon bulb for low beam (optional)  
D2R (35W)  
Open hood.  
Warning!  
Push down tab at top end of cover (2) and remove. Pull  
off electrical connector (3) or (4). Unhook clamping ring  
and pull out bulb together with clamping ring. Remove  
bulb.  
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is  
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp  
and its components. We recommend that you have  
such work done by a qualified technician.  
Insert new bulb (seating properly in cutouts of bulb  
socket), mount clamping ring. Reinstall and push  
electrical connector on securely. Reinstall cover (2).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parking, standing and turn signal lamp  
(2357 NA [28.5/8.3W/30/2.2 cp] bulb)  
7
6
7
5
1
6
P82.10-2353-26  
P82.10-2354-26  
Open hood.  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Reinstall bulb socket.  
Insert screwdriver (supplied in vehicle tool kit) into hole  
for release lever (5). Move screwdriver sideways toward  
radiator and then rearward. Remove the released lamp  
assembly.  
To reinstall lamp assembly, slide its tabs (6) into  
guides (7), continue to push lamp in until it engages in  
lock.  
Twist bulb socket (1) counterclockwise and pull out.  
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and  
remove.  
Exterior lamps  
233  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
234  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
Taillamp assemblies  
Open trunk lid:  
Remove cover in right side panel, and first aid kit in left  
side panel.  
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. Push  
bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.  
1
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Reinstall bulb socket, and close cover.  
4
5
2
3
P82.10-2356-26  
1 Stop Lamp (1154 21W/32 cp bulb)  
2 Turn signal lamp (1156 NA 21 W/24 cp bulb)  
3 Tail, parking and standing lamp (67 5W/4 cp bulb)  
4 Backup lamp (1154 21 W/32 cp bulb)  
5 Driver’s side:  
Rear fog lamp (1155 21W/32 cp bulb)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Side marker lamp, front  
(5 W/4 cp bulb)  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Insert bulb socket with bulb in lamp and twist  
clockwise.  
To reinstall lamp, set back end of lamp into bumper and  
let front end snap into place.  
High mounted stop lamp,  
Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror  
The high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp) and the  
additional turn signals on the exterior mirrors are  
equipped with LEDs.  
Have the system checked at an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center if a malfunction occurs.  
P82.10-2477-26  
Carefully slide lamp towards front (arrow), and remove  
back end first from bumper.  
Turn bulb socket with bulb counterclockwise and pull  
out. Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and  
remove.  
Exterior lamps  
235  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
236  
Car care  
Index  
Remote control  
Changing batteries in the remote control  
Checking batteries  
Changing batteries  
If the transmit button Œ or is pressed longer  
than 1 second, the battery check lamp in the transmitter  
eye (1) lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries  
are in order.  
Unfold master key from holder by pressing key release  
button (2). Pull off battery cover (3).  
Change batteries if the battery check lamp does not light  
up briefly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Batteries contain materials that can harm the  
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of  
batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For  
disposal, please follow manufacturer‘s recommendation  
on battery package.  
Replacement Battery:  
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.  
Synchronizing remote control  
The system may have to be resynchronized, if the  
transmitter is without voltage for several minutes.  
Change batteries, inserting new ones with plus (+) side  
facing up.  
To synchronize system, aim transmitter eye at vehicle  
and briefly press transmit button Œ or twice.  
Within approximately 30 seconds insert key in steering  
lock and turn it to position 2.  
Press battery cover onto housing until locked in place.  
The remote control should once again be operational.  
Remote control  
237  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
238  
Car care  
Index  
Raising hardtop manually  
Raising hardtop manually  
A hex-socket wrench, located on the inside of the  
right-hand cover in the trunk, is required for this job.  
In case of malfunction, the hardtop can also be raised  
manually. This procedure should be performed with  
great care by 2 persons.  
1. Open doors or lower windows.  
2. For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock.  
3. Open trunk.  
Prior to raising the hardtop manually, make certain that  
all points listed under Retractable Hardtop (see  
page 122) were observed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
2
P65.10-2104-26  
P65.10-2105-26  
4. Open right-hand cover in trunk and remove hex-  
socket wrench.  
5. Expose left and right side cables (2). The cables are  
located behind the left and right side trunk trim  
panel covers.  
Using wrench turn screw (1) of the hydraulic pump  
counterclockwise to its stop.  
Keep wrench with you for later use in closing and  
locking the hardtop.  
Important!  
Do not operate the hardtop switch with screw (1) in the  
opened position, otherwise the hydraulic pump could be  
damaged.  
Raising hardtop manually  
239  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
240  
Car care  
Index  
Raising hardtop manually  
3
2
2
P65.10-2113-26  
P65.10-2107-26  
6. First person:  
8. Carefully bring back end of trunk lid down (arrow)  
until lock (3) audibly engages.  
Briefly pull on handles of cables (2) to release trunk  
lid hinge locks.  
Pull trunk lid rearward to its stop.  
Second person:  
Pull trunk lid rearward by pulling on trunk lid  
hinge.  
Warning!  
Do not place your hands near the upper windshield  
area, trunk lid, or between roof panels while the  
hardtop is being raised and locked. Serious  
personal injury may occur.  
7. Close trunk lid, then reopen it by holding each side  
of its front end, and swing it completely to the rear  
(arrows).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
4
6
P65.10-2108-26  
P65.10-2109-26  
9. Place hands from below on lower section of  
hardtop (4), and pull hardtop out of its storage  
compartment.  
10. With rear section of roof (5) in a vertical position,  
place hands on rear section of roof as shown, and  
guide pins (6) of roof front section into windshield  
frame.  
Warning!  
Do not place your hands in areas marked X.  
Serious personal injury may occur.  
Raising hardtop manually  
241  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
242  
Car care  
Index  
Raising hardtop manually  
8
7
SOS  
P65.10-2115-26  
P65.10-2111-26  
11. Remove cap from headliner.  
To close hardtop:  
12. Close trunk lid by placing flat hands near edges  
(arrows).  
Insert hex-socket wrench and turn clockwise (7) to  
its stop.  
Notes:  
The rear quarter windows cannot be closed.  
To lock hardtop:  
Have the hardtop operation checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Turn wrench counterclockwise (8) to its stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing wiper blade insert  
2
1
P82.30-2049-26  
For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock before  
replacing a wiper blade, otherwise the wiper motor can  
suddenly turn on and cause injury.  
Installation:  
Slide (direction of arrow) wiper blade insert into  
retainer claws until tabs are engaged.  
Removal:  
Slide wiper blade into end of wiper arm until it locks in  
place.  
Fold wiper arm forward. Tilt wiper blade downward.  
Press safety tab (1), push wiper blade downward (2) and  
remove.  
The wiper with air spoiler should be mounted on the  
driver’s side.  
Place wiper blade on firm support. Press down both tabs  
with a screw driver and slide (direction of arrow) the  
wiper blade insert out of the retainer claws.  
Replacing wiper blade insert  
243  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
244  
Car care  
Index  
Antenna  
Notes:  
Manual release of fuel filler flap  
Do not open engine hood with wiper arms folded  
forward.  
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield  
glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be  
scratched or broken.  
Make certain that the wiper blade is properly installed.  
An improperly installed wiper blade may cause  
windshield damage.  
1
Antenna  
To prevent damage or diminished radio reception after  
reinstallation, the non-retractable antenna should not  
be removed. The antenna is automatic car-wash safe.  
P80.20-2110-26  
The manual release knob is located behind cover (1) in  
the right slide trunk panel.  
In case the central locking system does not release the  
fuel filler flap, pull the manual release knob (arrow)  
while simultaneously opening the fuel filler flap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear window cleaning .............. 249  
Wiper blades .............................. 250  
Light alloy wheels .....................250  
Instrument cluster ..................... 251  
Steering wheel and  
gear selector lever ..................... 251  
Cup holder .................................. 251  
Hard plastic trim items ............. 251  
Plastic and rubber parts ........... 251  
Headliner and  
shelf behind roll bars ................252  
Upholstery ..................................252  
Seat belts ..................................... 252  
Vehicle care  
Cleaning and care of  
the vehicle ..................................246  
Power washer ..............................247  
Paintwork, painted body  
components .................................247  
Tar stains .....................................247  
Engine cleaning ..........................248  
Vehicle washing .........................248  
Headlamps, taillamps,  
turn signal lenses ......................249  
Window cleaning ........................249  
Contents - Vehicle care  
245  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
246  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
More frequent washings are necessary to deal with  
unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in  
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during  
winter operation.  
Warning!  
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some  
are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow  
the instructions on the particular container.  
Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when  
cleaning the inside.  
You should check your vehicle from time to time for  
stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be  
repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of  
corrosion.  
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed  
for cleaning your vehicle.  
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle.  
A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the  
underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged  
areas need to be reundercoated.  
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying  
external influences which, if gone unchecked, can  
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and  
cause lasting damage.  
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-  
base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for  
the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is  
neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz  
because of the possibility of incompatibility between  
materials used in the production process and others  
applied later.  
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying  
climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt,  
tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel,  
coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins  
etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint  
damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates  
the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse  
influences.  
We have selected car-care products and compiled  
recommendations which are specially matched to our  
vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.  
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care  
products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due  
to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed  
or repaired with the car-care products recommended  
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Paintwork, painted body components  
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied  
when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”,  
normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and  
washing detergent used.  
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of  
your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as  
well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care  
products.  
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be  
applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding  
(i.e. loss of gloss).  
Do not apply any of these products or wax if your  
vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.  
Additional information can be found in the booklet titled  
Vehicle Car Guide”.  
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and  
provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips  
from stones, vehicle doors etc.).  
Power washer  
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle  
always observe manufacturers’ operating instructions.  
Tar stains  
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become  
more difficult to remove. A tar remover is  
recommended.  
Caution!  
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The  
intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.  
Always replace a damaged tire.  
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface.  
Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical  
connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
247  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
248  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Engine cleaning  
Vehicle washing  
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to  
protect electrical components and connectors from the  
intrusion of water and cleaning agents.  
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct  
sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as  
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.  
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax  
should be applied to the engine compartment after  
every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control  
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The  
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any  
wax.  
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of  
water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the  
ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the  
sponge and chamois frequently.  
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a  
chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the  
finish.  
Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the  
vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the  
outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged.  
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt  
as soon as possible.  
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the  
inner sides of the wheels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses  
Rear window cleaning  
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz  
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.  
The corner flaps of the rear shelf partially cover the rear  
window. This prevents the window from being fully  
cleaned with the hardtop closed.  
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use  
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses.  
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or  
sponge.  
Important!  
Do not manually move corner flaps of rear shelf. Doing  
so will result in damage to the roof folding mechanism  
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited  
Warranty.  
Window cleaning  
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An  
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.  
Warning!  
If a warning sounds and the indicator lamp in the  
hardtop switch blinks, immediately stop cleaning  
and move back from window to prevent possible  
injury.  
Note:  
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove  
electronic key from steering lock before cleaning the  
windshield, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly  
turn on and cause injury.  
The hardtop is lowered into its storage  
compartment.  
Renewed momentary operation of hardtop switch  
extends the time by another 7 minutes.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
249  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
250  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Wiper blades  
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and  
detergent solution.  
Note:  
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter  
switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the  
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.  
Light alloy wheels  
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for  
regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.  
Prior to cleaning the inside of the rear window, operate  
hardtop via the switch until rear shelf (1) is in a vertical  
position. Leave key in steering lock position 2.  
If possible, clean wheels once a week with  
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft  
bristle brush and a strong spray of water.  
The roof will remain in this position for approximately  
7 minutes, sufficient time for cleaning the inside of the  
rear window.  
Follow instructions on container.  
Note:  
Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could  
lead to corrosion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument cluster  
Hard plastic trim items  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft  
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.  
Plastic and rubber parts  
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.  
Steering wheel and gear selector lever  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean  
with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.  
Cup holder  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
251  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
252  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Headliner and shelf behind roll bars  
Seat belts  
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo  
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.  
The webbing must not be treated with chemical  
cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and  
soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above  
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.  
Upholstery  
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that  
have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet  
etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently  
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper  
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be  
prevented.  
Warning!  
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely  
weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to  
provide adequate protection.  
Leather Upholstery  
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry  
thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved  
Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning  
perforated leather as its underside should not become  
wet.  
Cloth Upholstery  
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo  
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine oils ...................................... 268  
Engine oil additives ......................268  
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........268  
Brake fluid ...................................... 268  
Premium unleaded gasoline ........269  
Fuel requirements ........................ 269  
Gasoline additives ......................... 270  
Coolants ..........................................270  
Consumer information ................. 272  
Technical data  
Spare parts service ........................254  
Warranty coverage .........................254  
Identification labels .......................255  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............257  
Technical data ................................260  
Fuels, coolants,  
lubricants etc. – capacities ......266  
Contents - Technical data  
253  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
254  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
Spare parts service  
Warranty coverage  
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock  
of original spare parts required for maintenance and  
repair work. In addition, strategically located parts  
distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts  
service.  
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the  
“warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty  
Information booklet and your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any  
defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in  
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:  
More than 300 000 different spare parts, for  
Mercedes-Benz models, are available.  
1. New vehicle limited warranty  
2. Emission system warranty  
3. Emission performance warranty  
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to  
stringent quality inspections. Each part has been  
specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and  
adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.  
4. California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont  
emission control systems warranty  
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should  
be installed.  
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties,  
copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
Important!  
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not  
authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle  
which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty, or compromise its durability or  
safety.  
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet  
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information  
booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Identification labels  
2
3
1
P62.10-2022-26  
P63.20-2446-26  
1 Certification Label and Paintwork No.  
2 Vehicle Identification No. (VIN)  
3 Engine No.  
Technical data  
255  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
256  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)  
5 Emission control label  
6 Information Label California version  
Vacuum line routing for emission control system  
When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle  
identification and engine number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive  
3
3
4
4
7
7
5
5
9
9
8
2
8
2
1
1
6
6
P13.20-2008-26  
P13.20-2007-26  
SLK 230 Kompressor  
routing, belt I  
SLK 230 Kompressor  
routing, belt II  
The engine is equipped with two poly-V-belts.  
For dimensions of the poly-V-belts, see page 260.  
1 Crankshaft  
5 Idler pulley  
2 Air conditioner compressor  
3 Power steering pump  
4 Coolant pump  
6 Generator (alternator)  
7 Idler pulley  
8 Idler pulley  
9 Supercharger  
Technical data  
257  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
258  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
1 Crankshaft  
2 Air conditioner compressor  
3 Power steering pump  
4 Coolant pump  
3
4
7
5
9
5 Idler pulley  
6 Generator (alternator)  
7 Idler pulley  
8
2
1
6
8 Idler pulley  
9 Supercharger  
P13.20-2009-26  
SLK 230 Kompressor  
routing combined, belts I and II  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Automatic belt tensioner  
2 Crankshaft  
5
3 Air conditioner compressor  
4 Generator (alternator)  
5 Idler pulley  
6
1
7
6 Power steering pump  
7 Coolant pump  
4
2
3
For dimensions of the poly-V-belt, see page 260.  
SLK 320, SLK 32 AMG  
belt routing  
Technical data  
259  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
260  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
Technical data  
Model  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR (170.449)1 SLK 320 (170.465)1  
SLK 32 AMG (170.466)1  
Engine  
111  
112  
112  
Mode of operation  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
No. of cylinders  
Bore  
4
6
6
3.58 in (90.90 mm)  
3.54 in (89.90 mm)  
3.54 in (89.90 mm)  
Stroke  
3.48 in (88.40 mm)  
3.30 in (84.00 mm)  
3.30 in (84.00 mm)  
Total piston displacement 140.1 cu.in. (2295 cm3)  
195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3) 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)  
Compression ratio  
8.8:1  
10:1  
9.0:1  
Output acc. to  
SAE J 1349  
192 hp/5500 rpm  
(142 kW/5300 rpm)  
215 hp/5700 rpm  
(160 kW/5700 rpm)  
349 hp/6100 rpm  
260 kW/6100 rpm  
Maximum torque acc. to  
SAE J 1349  
200 ft.lb/2500 rpm  
(270 Nm/2500 rpm)  
229 ft.lb/3000 rpm  
(310 Nm/3000 rpm)  
333 ft.lb/4400 rpm  
(450 Nm/4400 rpm)  
Maximum engine speed  
Firing order  
5800 rpm  
1-3-4-2  
6000 rpm  
1-4-3-6-2-5  
2390 mm  
6200 rpm  
1-4-3-6-2-5  
2390 mm  
Poly-V-belt  
1875 mm (routing I)  
1355 mm (routing II)  
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the  
corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rims – Tires  
Model  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR  
Except Sport Package  
SLK 320  
Except Sport Package  
Rims and summer tires  
Rims front axle  
light alloy rims  
Wheel offset  
7 J x 16 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
7 J x 16 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
Rims rear axle  
light alloy rims  
Wheel offset  
8 J x 16 H 2  
1.18 in (30 mm)  
8 J x 16 H 2  
1.18 in (30 mm)  
Radial-ply tires  
front axle  
rear axle  
205/55 R 16 91 V  
225/50 R 16 92 V2  
205/55 R 16 91 W  
225/50 R 16 92 W2  
2
Must not be used with snow chains.  
Technical data  
261  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
Driving  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
cluster display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
262  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
Model  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR/  
SLK 320  
SLK 32 AMG  
Sport Package  
Rims and summer tires  
Rims front axle  
light alloy rims  
Wheel offset  
71/2 J x 17 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
71/2 J x 17 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
Rims rear axle  
light alloy rims  
Wheel offset  
81/2 J x 17 H 2  
1.34 in (34 mm)  
81/2 J x 17 H 2  
1.34 in (34 mm)  
Radial-ply tires  
front axle  
rear axle  
225/45 ZR 173  
225/45 R 17 91 Y5  
245/40 R 17 91 Y2, 6  
245/40 ZR 172, 4  
2
3
4
5
6
Must not be used with snow chains.  
Also permissible: 225/45 R 17 91 Y  
Also permissible: 245/40 R 17 91 Y2  
Also permissible: 225/45 ZR 17 91 Y  
Also permissible: 245/40 ZR 17 91 Y2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR  
SLK 320  
SLK 32 AMG  
Rims and winter tires  
Rims (light alloy)  
Wheel offset  
7 J x 16 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
7 J x 16 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
7 J x 16 H 2  
1.46 in (37 mm)  
Radial-ply tires  
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S  
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S  
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S  
Spare wheel  
Rim (light alloy)  
Wheel offset  
41/2 B x 15 H 2  
0.47 in (12 mm)  
41/2 B x 16 H 2  
0.47 in (12 mm)  
41/2 B x 16 H 2  
0.47 in (12 mm)  
Collapsible tire  
165-15 89 P 2  
165/70-16 92 P 2  
165/70-16 92 P 2  
2
Must not be used with snow chains.  
Technical data  
263  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
264  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
Electrical system  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR  
14 V/90 A  
SLK 320  
SLK 32 AMG  
Generator (alternator)  
Starter motor  
Battery  
14 V/115 A  
12V/1.7 kW  
12V/74 Ah  
14 V/120 A  
12V/1.7 kW  
12V/74 Ah  
12V/1.1 kW  
12V/74 Ah  
Spark plugs  
Bosch F 7 KTCR  
Bosch F 8 DPER  
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  
NGK PFR 5-11  
NGK IFR 6D1O  
Electrode gap  
Tightening torque  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Weights (see certification tag)  
Trunk load max.  
220 lb (100 kg)  
Main Dimensions  
Model  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR/ SLK 32 AMG  
SLK 320  
Overall vehicle length  
Overall vehicle width  
Overall height  
Wheel base  
157.9 in (4010 mm)  
67.5 in (1715 mm)  
50.4 in (1279 mm)  
94.5 in (2400 mm)  
58.6 in (1488 mm)  
58.5 in (1485 mm)  
157.9 in (4010 mm)  
67.5 in (1715 mm)  
50.4 in (1279 mm)  
94.5 in (2400 mm)  
58.6 in (1488 mm)  
58.5 in (1477 mm)  
Track, front  
Track, rear  
Technical data  
265  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
266  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. – capacities  
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended  
by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
Model  
Capacity  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Engine with oil filter  
SLK 230  
SLK 320  
6.1 US qt (5.5 l)  
Recommended engine oils  
SLK 32 AMG 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)  
Automatic transmission  
Manual transmission  
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)  
Automatic transmission fluid  
Transmission oil  
SLK 230  
SLK 320  
1.6 US qt (1.5 l)  
1.9 US qt (1.8 l)  
Rear axle  
1.4 US qt (1.3 l)  
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90  
MB Power steering fluid  
Power steering  
Front wheel hubs  
Brake system  
Cooling system  
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)  
approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each  
approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5 l)  
High temperature roller bearing grease  
MB Brake fluid (DOT 4)  
SLK 230  
SLK 320  
approx. 9.8 US qt (9.3 l)  
approx. 11.8 US qt (11.2 l)  
MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze  
SLK 32 AMG approx. 15.3 US qt (14.5 l)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model  
Capacity  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Windshield/Headlamp  
washer system  
approx. 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)  
MB Windshield washer  
concentrate “S” 1  
Fuel tank including  
a reserve of  
approx. 15.8 US gal (60.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:  
approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)  
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86  
MON)  
Air conditioner system  
R-134a refrigerant and special PAC  
lubricant (Never R-12)  
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see  
page 199.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Instruments  
267  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
268  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Engine oils  
Air conditioner refrigerant  
Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in  
our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils  
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on  
recommended brands is available in the Factory  
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil  
is used in the air conditioner system.  
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil,  
otherwise damage to the system will occur.  
Brake fluid  
Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for  
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in  
engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake  
fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of  
moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard  
operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to  
the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing  
the system‘s efficiency.  
Engine oil additives  
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be  
harmful to the engine operation.  
The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two  
years, preferably in the spring.  
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil  
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited  
Warranty.  
It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by  
Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
will provide you with additional information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Premium unleaded gasoline  
Caution!  
Fuel requirements  
Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM  
standard D 439:  
To maintain the engine’s durability and performance,  
premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium  
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used,  
follow these precautions:  
The octane number (posted at the pump) must be  
91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane  
number and the Motor (M) octane number: [(R+M)/2].  
This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.  
have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded  
regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon  
as possible,  
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as  
Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the  
ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not  
exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%.  
avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,  
do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal  
position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in  
mountainous terrain.  
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3%  
plus additional cosolvents.  
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed.  
Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded  
gasoline, can be used.  
These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements  
such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor  
pressure etc..  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
269  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
270  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Gasoline additives  
Coolants  
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon  
build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz  
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and  
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:  
recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing  
additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.  
corrosion protection,  
freeze protection,  
After an extended period of using fuels without such  
additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the  
intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to  
engine performance problems such as:  
boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point).  
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a  
coolant providing freeze protection to approximately  
-22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.  
warm-up hesitation,  
unstable idle,  
knocking/pinging,  
misfire,  
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the  
boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling  
system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).  
The coolant solution must be used year round to provide  
the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the  
boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every  
3 years.  
power loss.  
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel.  
They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be  
harmful to the engine operation.  
To provide the important corrosion protection, the  
solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze  
(equals a freeze protection to approx. -22 °F [-30 °C]). If  
you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/  
antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. -49 °F [-45°C]),  
Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel  
quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the engine temperature will increase due to the lower  
heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not  
use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.  
Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in  
the hot southern regions), you should have the  
anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The  
coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring  
your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
for service.  
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/  
antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper  
level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).  
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum  
requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal  
drinking water. If your are not sure about the water  
quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity  
Model  
Approx. freeze protection  
– 35°F  
(– 37°C)  
– 49°F  
(– 45°C)  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze  
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The  
use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines  
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used  
in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the  
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/  
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly  
shortened service life.)  
SLK 230 KOMPRESSOR 4.9 US qt  
(4.7 l)  
5.4 US qt  
(5.1 l)  
SLK 320  
5.9 US qt  
(5.6 l)  
6.5 US qt  
(6.1 l)  
Therefore the following product is strongly  
recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz  
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.  
SLK 32 AMG  
7.7 US qt  
(7.3 l)  
8.5 US qt  
(8.0 l)  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
271  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
272  
Car care  
Index  
Consumer information  
Consumer information  
Treadwear  
This has been prepared as required of all manufactures  
of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal  
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic  
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half  
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and  
may depart significantly from the norm due to  
Uniform tire quality grading  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the  
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum  
section width. For example:  
variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Tread wear 200 Traction AA  
Temperature A  
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to federal  
safety requirements in addition to these grades.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Traction  
Temperature  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are “AA”,  
“A”, “B”, and “C”. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked “C” may  
have poor traction performance.  
The temperature grades are “A” (the highest), “B”, and  
“C”, representing the tire‘s resistance to the generation  
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor  
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can  
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce  
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden  
tire failure. The grade “C” corresponds to a level of  
performance which all passenger vehicle tires must  
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law.  
Warning!  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straightahead braking traction tests, and does not  
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or  
peak traction characteristics.  
Warning!  
The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not  
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or  
excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause excessive heat build up  
and possible tire failure.  
Consumer information  
273  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
274  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
CD changer .................................................................105  
CD mode .....................................................................104  
Operating and display elements ...............................94  
Operating safety ..........................................................93  
Operation – audio and telephone .............................93  
Radio mode ..................................................................99  
Telephone operation .................................................108  
Automatic central locking ..............................................31  
Automatic transmission ................................................147  
Emergency Operation ...............................................155  
Fluid level ...................................................................196  
Program mode selector switch ................................154  
Selector lever positions ............................................150  
Transmission selector lever,  
Index  
A
ABS (Antilock brake system) ....................................... 171  
Malfunction indicator lamp ..................................... 186  
Adjusting telescoping steering column ........................65  
Air conditioner refrigerant ...........................................268  
Air pump (except SLK 32 AMG) ..................................200  
Air pump (SLK 32 AMG only) ......................................202  
Airbag deactivation system ............................................ 51  
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ........................................ 190  
Airbags ..............................................................................54  
Alarm system ............................................................. 35, 37  
Antenna ...........................................................................244  
Anticorrosion / antifreeze ..................164, 198, 266, 270  
Antilock brake system (ABS) ....................................... 171  
Malfunction indicator lamp ..................................... 186  
Antitheft alarm system ...................................................35  
Aquaplaning ................................................................... 161  
Ashtrays ...........................................................................116  
Audio system ....................................................................93  
Anti-theft system ........................................................95  
Button and soft key operation ...................................96  
Cassette mode ........................................................... 101  
manually unlocking ............................................ 229  
B
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system .....................51  
Self-test .........................................................................51  
BAS (Brake assist system) ............................................169  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................185  
Battery ............................................................................ 220  
Charge indicator lamp ..............................................188  
Recycling ....................................................................221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Block heater .................................................................... 165  
Brake assist system (BAS) ............................................ 169  
Malfunction indicator lamp ..................................... 185  
Brake fluid ......................................................................268  
Brake pad wear indicator lamp .................................... 184  
Brake warning lamp ......................................................183  
Brake fluid low ..........................................................183  
Brakes ..................................................... 158, 169, 171, 173  
Bulbs  
Locking and unlocking ...............................................25  
Mechanical keys ..........................................................27  
Remote control ............................................ 22, 24, 236  
Vehicle keys .................................................................22  
Changing wheels ........................................................... 207  
Inflating the collapsible spare tire .........................212  
Storing spare wheel in wheel well .........................213  
Charge indicator lamp ...................................................188  
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp .................182  
Check regularly and before a long trip .......................179  
Checking engine oil level  
See Replacing bulbs .................................................230  
Via engine oil level indicator ....................................79  
Via oil dipstick ...........................................................197  
Child restraint .....................................................44, 51, 63  
Child seat  
C
Capacities  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ...............................266  
Catalytic converter ........................................................ 140  
CD changer installed .....................................................105  
Cellular telephone ..........................................................118  
Center console .................................................................. 18  
Central locking switch ....................................................30  
Central locking system ...................................................24  
Automatic central locking ......................................... 31  
Choosing global or selective mode ...........................25  
Emergency release for trunk lid ...............................35  
General notes ...............................................................23  
See Infant and child restraint systems ....................63  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ................................ 246  
Climate control .................................................................86  
Air Recirculation .........................................................91  
Basic setting .................................................................88  
Defogging windows .....................................................89  
Defrosting .....................................................................89  
Dust Filter .....................................................................92  
Rear window defroster ...............................................90  
Residual Engine Heat Utilization (REST) ................91  
Special settings ...........................................................89  
Index  
275  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
276  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
Clock, setting .................................................................... 76  
Coin Holder ......................................................................116  
Combination switch ........................................................83  
Consumer information ..................................................272  
Control and operation of radio transmitters ............. 130  
Coolant level  
Adding coolant .......................................................... 198  
Checking .................................................................... 198  
Coolant temperature gauge ............................................75  
Coolants ...........................................................................270  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity ......................... 271  
Cruise control ................................................................. 166  
Cup holder .......................................................................114  
E
Electronic stability program (ESP) ..............................173  
Control switch ...........................................................175  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................185  
Synchronizing ........................................................... 174  
Warning lamp ............................................................185  
Emergency call  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................132  
Emergency release for trunk lid ....................................35  
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) .........................53  
SRS indicator lamp ...................................................184  
Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................32  
Emission control ............................................................ 141  
Emission control label .................................................. 256  
Engine compartment .....................................................194  
Engine oil additives ...................................................... 268  
Engine oil consumption ..................................................80  
Engine oil level  
Checking .............................................................. 79, 197  
Warning ......................................................................188  
Engine oil level indicator ................................................79  
Engine oils ..................................................................... 268  
ESP (Electronic stability program) ..............................173  
Control switch ...........................................................175  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................185  
D
Daytime running lamps ..................................................82  
Deep water  
Driving instructions ................................................. 165  
Display illumination ........................................................ 74  
Doors ..................................................................................28  
Drinking and driving ....................................................157  
Drive sensibly - Save Fuel ............................................ 157  
Driving instructions ......................................................157  
Driving off .......................................................................159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synchronizing ........................................................... 174  
Warning lamp ............................................................185  
ETR (Emergency tensioning retractor) .........................53  
SRS indicator lamp ................................................... 184  
F
First aid kit ......................................................................192  
Flat tire  
See Changing wheels .............................................. 207  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........................................77  
FSS indicator lamp ............................................. 73, 189  
Fuel  
Gasoline additives .................................................... 270  
Premium unleaded gasoline ...................177, 267, 269  
Fuel cap placement warning ........................................185  
Fuel filler flap  
Manual release ......................................................... 244  
Fuel requirements ........................................................ 269  
Fuel reserve warning .....................................................185  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities .............. 266  
Fuse box ..........................................................................192  
Fuses, electrical ..............................................................192  
Express opening and closing  
(power windows) ........................................................111  
Exterior lamp failure indicator .................................... 189  
Exterior lamp switch ....................................................... 81  
Exterior lamps ................................................................230  
Additional turn signals  
on the exterior mirror .........................................235  
Headlamp assembly .................................................231  
High mounted stop lamp .........................................235  
Low and high beam ..................................................232  
Parking lamps ..................................................233, 234  
Replacing bulbs .........................................................230  
Side marker lamp, front ...........................................235  
Standing lamps .................................................233, 234  
Taillamp assemblies .................................................234  
Turn signal lamps ............................................233, 234  
Exterior mirror adjustment ............................................67  
Index  
277  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
278  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
High beams  
G
See Combination switch ............................................83  
Hood .................................................................................194  
Garage door opener ........................................................119  
Gasoline  
Additives ....................................................................270  
Fuel requirements ....................................................269  
Premium unleaded ...................................................269  
General notes  
I
Identification labels ...................................................... 255  
Indicator lamps  
on the central locking system ...................................23  
Global locking  
in the instrument cluster .................................. 72, 182  
Infant and child restraint systems ................................63  
Inflating the collapsible spare tire ..............................212  
Information call  
See Central locking system .......................................24  
Glove box ..........................................................................114  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................132  
Instrument cluster ...........................................................70  
Activating .....................................................................74  
Indicator lamps ............................................................72  
Malfunction and indicator lamps ...........................182  
Instrument lamps ............................................................. 74  
Instruments and controls ............................................... 16  
Interior  
H
Hardtop, retractable ......................................................122  
Lowering .....................................................................123  
Raising ........................................................................125  
Raising manually ......................................................238  
Hazard warning flasher switch .....................................85  
Head restraints  
Removal ........................................................................40  
Headlamp cleaning system ............................................82  
Headlights ......................................................................... 81  
Heated seats .....................................................................42  
General notes ............................................................. 113  
Interior lighting .............................................................. 112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lighter ............................................................................. 117  
J
Limp Home Mode  
Jack (SLK 32 AMG only) ...............................................202  
Jump starting ..................................................................222  
(Automatic transmission) ........................................155  
Locking and unlocking ....................................................25  
Low beams  
See Combination switch ............................................83  
Low engine coolant level warning ...............................187  
Luggage cover .................................................................128  
K
Keys, changing batteries ...............................................236  
Keys, vehicle .....................................................................22  
M
L
Maintenance ................................................................... 131  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Lamps, exterior  
in the instrument cluster .........................................182  
Manual locking/unlocking the doors ...........................27  
Manual transmission ....................................................145  
Mechanical keys ...............................................................27  
Mirror, exterior, adjusting ..............................................67  
Mirror, exterior, rear view ..............................................67  
Mirror, inside, rear view .................................................66  
Fog lamps .............................................................81, 234  
Headlamps ..........................................81, 189, 231, 249  
Parking lamps ............................................ 81, 231, 233  
Replacing bulbs .........................................................230  
Side marker lamp, front .....................................81, 235  
Standing lamps ........................................... 81, 231, 233  
Taillamps ............................................ 81, 189, 234, 249  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............................................257  
Index  
279  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
280  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
N
R
Night security illumination ..........................................112  
Radio  
See Radio mode ...........................................................99  
Radio and telephone ......................................................130  
Radio transmitters .........................................................130  
Rear view mirrors ............................................................66  
Exterior .........................................................................67  
Inside ............................................................................66  
Rear window defroster ....................................................90  
Remote control .................................................................22  
Battery replacement ................................................ 236  
Synchronizing .......................................................... 237  
Replacing bulbs ............................................................. 230  
Replacing wiper blade insert ...................................... 243  
Reporting safety defects ................................................. 13  
Residual Engine Heat Utilization (REST) .....................91  
Retractable hardtop .......................................................122  
Roadside assistance ...........................................................8  
Roadside assistance call  
O
On-board diagnostic system .........................................182  
Operator’s manual ............................................................. 6  
Outside temperature indicator ......................................75  
Overhead control panel ................................................... 19  
P
Panic button ......................................................................26  
Parcel net in passenger footwell ..................................118  
Parking ............................................................................ 159  
Parking brake ............................... 156, 158, 159, 174, 183  
Power assistance ............................................................158  
Power seats .......................................................................38  
Power windows ................................................................111  
Express opening ........................................................111  
Operate with hard top switch .................................122  
Problems with your vehicle ........................................... 12  
Product information .......................................................... 5  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special settings (Climate control) .................................89  
SRS (Supplemental restraint system) ...........................52  
Indicator lamp ...........................................................184  
SRS malfunction ..........................................................55  
Start lock-out .....................................................................23  
Malfunction lamp ......................................................189  
Starting and turning off the engine ............................144  
Steering column, telescopic  
Adjusting ......................................................................65  
Warning lamp ............................................................186  
Steering lock ...................................................................142  
Storage box  
Trunk floor ................................................................ 202  
Storage compartments .................................................. 115  
Armrest ....................................................................... 115  
Center console ........................................................... 115  
Glove box .................................................................... 114  
Trunk floor ................................................................ 200  
Stowing items in the vehicle ........................................192  
Sun visors ........................................................................ 113  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ...........................52  
Indicator lamp ...........................................................184  
SRS malfunction ..........................................................55  
Synchronizing remote control .................................... 237  
S
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,  
emergency tensioning retractor and airbag ........... 61  
Seat belts ...........................................................................44  
Fastening ......................................................................46  
Seat belt nonusage warning system ........................45  
Unfastening ..................................................................48  
Warning lamp ............................................................184  
Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..................44  
Seats ...................................................................................38  
Power seats ..................................................................38  
Seat heater ...................................................................42  
Selective locking  
See Central locking system .......................................24  
Service indicator  
See Flexible service system (FSS) ............................77  
Setting the audio volume ................................................97  
Shelf behind roll bars .....................................................118  
Side marker lamp ..........................................................235  
Snow chains .................................................................... 163  
SOS-call  
See Tele Aid ............................................................... 132  
Spare parts service ........................................................254  
Spare wheel ....................................................................205  
Spare wheel (except SLK 32 AMG) .............................200  
Index  
281  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
282  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
Rims and tires ...........................................................261  
Rotating wheels ........................................................ 204  
Tire inflation pressure ............................................. 219  
Tire replacement ...................................................... 203  
Tire speed rating .......................................................162  
Tire traction ...............................................................162  
Winter driving instructions .....................................163  
T
Tachometer ....................................................................... 76  
Technical data ................................................................260  
Electrical system .......................................................264  
Main Dimensions ......................................................265  
Rims – Tires ............................................................... 261  
Weights .......................................................................265  
Tele Aid ........................................................................... 132  
Emergency calls ........................................................ 133  
Information ................................................................ 136  
Initiating an emergency call manually ................. 134  
Roadside Assistance ................................................. 135  
Telephones and two-way radio ..................................... 130  
Telescoping steering column  
Adjusting ......................................................................65  
Warning lamp ............................................................186  
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................ 131  
TIREFIT ............................................................................ 214  
Reifen abdichten ....................................................... 215  
TIREFIT (SLK 32 AMG only) ........................................202  
Tires  
Tool kit  
See Air pump, spare wheel,  
vehicle tools, storage compartment .................. 200  
See Storage box, TIREFIT-Kit,  
air pump, vehicle tools ....................................... 202  
Tow-away alarm ................................................................37  
Towing the vehicle ........................................................ 224  
Transmission selector lever,  
manually unlocking ................................................. 229  
Traveling abroad ............................................................165  
Trip Odometer .................................................................. 76  
Trunk .................................................................................33  
Separately locked ........................................................33  
Trunk lid  
Emergency release ......................................................35  
Release switch .............................................................33  
Turn signal failure ...........................................................83  
Turn signals ......................................................................83  
Consumer information .............................................272  
Driving instructions ................................................. 160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield and  
V
headlamp washer system .........................................199  
Low fluid level warning lamp ..................................187  
Winter driving ................................................................164  
Winter driving instructions ..........................................163  
Wiper blade  
Vanity Mirror ...................................................................113  
Vehicle jack (except SLK 32 AMG) .............................201  
Vehicle tools (except SLK 32 AMG) ............................200  
Vehicle tools (SLK 32 AMG only) ................................202  
Replacing insert ....................................................... 243  
Wiper operation  
W
See Combination switch ............................................83  
Warning lamps  
See Indicator lamps  
in the instrument cluster ......................................72  
Warranty Coverage ........................................................254  
Washing the vehicle ......................................................248  
What you should know at the gas station .................. 177  
Wheels .............................................................................203  
Changing ....................................................................207  
Light alloy wheels .....................................................250  
Rims and tires ...........................................................261  
Rotating ......................................................................204  
Spare wheel ...............................................................205  
Where to find it .................................................................11  
Wind screen ....................................................................127  
Windows  
See Power windows ...................................................111  
Index  
283  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service and Literature  
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your  
vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.  
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com.  
Warning!  
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper  
or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its  
equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.  
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this  
Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior  
authorization in writing.  
Title illustration no. P00.00-2865-26  
Press time 10/23/01  
GSP/SIP  
Printed in Germany  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order No. 6515 3242 13 Part No. 170 584 57 96 USA Edition B 2002  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Please observe the following:  
BOOKSPINE for Operator’s Manual  
5
/ in. (1.6 cm)  
3.5“ (8.9 cm)  
8
170  
Operator’s Manual SLK-Class  
Please ensure the correct position of model code and model name  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lennox International Inc Air Conditioner Lennox Healthy Climate User Manual
Linak Battery Charger CB08 XA User Manual
Linksys Network Card WET11 User Manual
Logitech Universal Remote 1100i User Manual
Maytag Clothes Dryer MEDC400VW User Manual
Melissa Coffeemaker 245067 User Manual
Melissa Styling Iron 235 018 User Manual
Mellerware Beverage Dispenser 30100 75 550 W User Manual
Metra Electronics Automobile Accessories 99 5808 User Manual
Metz Flat Panel Television 42TN92 User Manual